# List of EE courses

B.Tech students must get consent of teacher (COT) before registering for graduate courses | ||||
---|---|---|---|---|

S.No | Course No | Course Name / Syllabus | Credit | L - T- P - E - O - TH |

1 | BT1020 | Material and Energy Balances Course No : BT1020Course Title : Material and Energy BalancesPre Requisite : Extended Tutorial: 1Outside Class Hours : 6Total Hours PerWeek : Description : To understand the bioprocesses described in words and convert them to flow charts and mathematical expressions. To understand basic material and energy balances and their applications in bioprocess industries by using examples primarily based on bioprocess operations and other biological systems. To develop an ability to perform material and energy balances simultaneously for biological systems in steady state and transient state Course Content : Units and dimensions; significant figures; process variables and stoichiometry. System and surrounding; steady and unsteady state; problem solving strategy; choosing a basis; general material balance equation; balances on single and multiple units without reactions; balances on processes involving reactions; recycle; bypass and purge; balances involving cell growth and product formation. First law of thermodynamics; balances on closed and open systems; calculation of enthalpy changes; general energy balance equation; balances on non-reactive and reactive processes; heat of reaction for processes with biomass production; thermodynamics of microbial growth; balances on cell culture. Unsteady state material and energy balances; simultaneous unsteady state balances; solving unsteady state balances Text Books : 1. David M. Himmelblau, James B. Riggs, Basic Principles and Calculations in Chemical Engineering, 7th Edition, 2004, Prentice Hall India 2. Richard M. Felder, Ronald W. Rousseau, Elementary Principles of Chemical Processes, 3rd Edition, 2000, John Wiley & Sons Reference Books : 1. Pauline M. Doran, Bioprocess Engineering Principles, 1995, Academic Press | 11 | 3 - 1 - 0 - 1 - 6 - |

2 | EC5410 | Fibre Optic Communication Technology Course No : EC5410 Course Title : Fibre Optic Communication TechnologyPre Requisite : Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 8Total Hours PerWeek : 12Description : Fiber Optic Communication Technology is intended as a graduate level course, which is structured such that there is a seamless transition from Physical Layer issues to Data Link Layer issues in optical communication systems and networks. Course Content : Introduction: Motivation for optical networks, Link requirements, throughputs, distance-bandwidth product Simple Link Design: Modes in optical fibers, losses and attenuation. LED/LD/DFB-based transmitters, modulation, extinction ratio, PIN/PIN-TIA receivers, noise sources, bandwidth vs sensitivity, simple link design. Multi-hop Link Design: Inline amplifiers, EDFA basic model, noise analysis, Raman Amplifier. Pre-amplifed receiver, OSNR, APD-based receiver, Chromatic Dispersion, effect on signal, mitigation, Power penalty approach to link design, multihop link design, WDM components, nonlinearity, PMD, PDL, crosstalk Networking Basics: Computer Network, definition and scope, layering concepts, a simple network architecture and its functions, ISO/OSI 7 layer reference model, functionality of first three layers, with emphasis on Data Link layer. Framing, error control, MAC layer functions, CSMA/CD, circuit, packet and message switching. Digital Transmission Basics: A simple synchronous TDM, timing inaccuracies, timing issues in practical digital links, master-slave and independent timing architectures, slips, elastic stores and asynchronous multiplexing. Basic Optical Networks: Plesiochronous Digital Heirarchy (PDH), E1, DS1 lines. DS2 frame structure and asynchronous multiplexing. Disadvantages of PDH and introduction to SDH networks, elements of SDH infrastructure, AU-4 justification and UPSR. Text Books : 1. Rajiv Ramaswamy, Kumar N. Sivarajan and Galen Sasaki, “Optical Networks - A Practical Perspective”, Morgan and Kaufmann, NY. 3 e, 2008. Reference Books : 1. L. L. Peterson and B S Davie, “Computer Networks. A system approach”, 2e, Margan and Kaufmann, 2000. 2. Bellamy, “Digital Telephony”, PHI, 2000. 3. Mynbaev and Scheiner, “Fiber Optic Communication Technology”, Pearson, 3rd Indian Reprint, 2003. 4. Bertsekas and Gallager, “Data Networks”. PHI. 5. Biswanath Mukherjee, “Optical WDM Networks” Springer, 2006. | 12 | 4 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 8 - 12 |

3 | EE1000 | Introduction to Electrical Engineering Course No : EE1000Course Title : Introduction to Electrical EngineeringPre Requisite : Extended Tutorial: Outside Class Hours : Total Hours PerWeek : Description : --- Course Content : Electrical Power and Energy – dc and ac power – polyphase systems, Electrical Machines. Semiconductor devices and their applications - Analog and digital systems – Methods of electrical communication – telephony – radio – television – computers and communications. Working Principles of some simple electrical gadgets such as radio – television, computer, mixie, mobile phone, etc. Text Books : 1. Vicent Del Toro, Electrical Engineering fundamentals, Prentice Hall India. 2. Zbar, Paul B Malvin, Albert Paul and Miller Michael. Basic electronics, Tata McGraw Hill. Reference Books : 1. Paul Horowitz, The art of electronics, Cambridge University Press | 2 | - - - - - |

4 | EE1100 | Basic Electrical Engineering Course No : EE1100Course Title : Basic Electrical EngineeringPre Requisite : Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 6Total Hours PerWeek : 10Description : This course provides a comprehensive understanding and applications of DC and AC circuits used in electrical and electronic devices, parameters of electrical circuits, single phase, three phase circuits, diodes and operational amplifiers circuits, transformers, induction and DC machines. Course Content : 1. Properties of resistance, Ohms law, KVL, KCL, mesh and nodal analysis, Network theorems: Superposition, Thevenin, Norton and maximum power transfer. 2. Properties of inductance and capacitance, DC transients: Series RL, RC, RLC and parallel RLC. 3. Single phase AC, voltage and current phasors, impedance, network theorems application to AC, frequency response of ac circuits, resonance, filters, active power, reactive power, apparent power, power factor. 4. Balanced Three phase AC, three phase power, star and delta connection. 5. Single phase transformer: Principle of operation, equivalent circuit, OC and SC test, voltage regulation, efficiency. 6. Three phase Induction motor: Construction, rotating magnetic field, principle of operation, slip, torque, equivalent circuit, efficiency. 7. DC machines: Principle of operation, excitation, equivalent circuit, emf, speed and torque characteristics. 8. Diodes and applications: Diode characteristics, voltage and current relationship, diode circuits-rectifiers, peak and envelop detectors, solar cell. 9. Operational amplifiers: Description of amplifiers as a black box and definition of gain, effect of feedback on gain, Operational amplifier circuits: Non-inverting, inverting, summing, differential, integrators, differentiators, buffers. Text Books : Electrical Engineering Fundamentals, Vincent Del Toro, Prentice Hall, 2006. Reference Books : [1] Electrical Circuit Theory and Technology, John Bird, Elsevier, 2011. [2] Essentials of Electrical and Computer Engineering, Kerns & Irwin, Pearson, 2004 [3] Electrical Engineering Concepts and Applications, Carlson and Gisser, Addison Wesley, 1990. | 10 | 3 - 1 - 0 - 0 - 6 - 10 |

5 | EE1101 | Signals and Systems Course No : EE1101Course Title : Signals and SystemsPre Requisite : Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 6Total Hours PerWeek : 10Description : At the end of this course, the student should be able to: 1. Understand and apply the concepts about linear time-invariant (LTI) systems 2. understand and apply Fourier Series representation of periodic continuous-time signals 3. understand and apply Fourier Transform representation of periodic and aperiodic continuous-time signals 4. Apply Laplace transforms to analyze LTI Systems Course Content : 1. Signals (continuous-time): Signal classification (analog-digital, energy-power, even-odd, periodic-aperiodic, deterministic-random etc.), standard signals (unit step, unit impulse, ramp, exponential, sinusoids), transformations of the independent variable (4 classes) 2. Systems (continuous-time): System classification (memory, causal, stable, linear, time-invariant, invertible etc.), Impulse response of an LTI system, convolution integral, graphical convolution, system properties from impulse response, complex exponential as eigenfunction of LTI systems, interconnection of LTI systems (6 classes) 3. Discrete-time signals and systems: Emphasize similarities and differences with continuous-time counterpart (3 classes) 4. Continuous-time Fourier series: Periodic signals and their properties, exponential and trigonometric FS representation of periodic signals, convergence, FS of standard periodic signals, salient properties of Fourier series, FS and LTI systems, some applications of FS (eg. filtering) (6 classes) 5. Continuous-time Fourier transform: Development of Fourier representation of aperiodic signals, convergence, FT of standard signals, FT of periodic signals, properties of FT, some applications of FT (eg. modulation) (6 classes) 6. Laplace Transform: Bilateral Laplace transform, region of convergence, properties of Laplace transform, standard Laplace transform pairs, transfer function of LTI system, characterising LTI system properties from transfer function, algebra of transfer functions and block diagram representations, Unilateral Laplace transform – brief introduction and application to simple initial value problems (8 classes) 7. Sampling (Bridge continuous and discrete): Sampling theorem and signal reconstruction, notion of aliasing with examples, Sampling in frequency domain (5 classes) Text Books : Signals and Systems: Oppenheim, Willsky and Nawab (2nd Edn). Reference Books : Principles of Linear Systems and Signals: B.P. Lathi (2nd Edn) | 10 | 3 - 1 - 0 - 0 - 6 - 10 |

6 | EE1102 | Introduction to Programming Course No : EE1102Course Title : Introduction to ProgrammingPre Requisite : Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 6Total Hours PerWeek : 12Description : EE1102 is currently a course on Introduction to programming using C language. The objective is to provide a basic introduction to programming through C language. Course Content : Course Contents: 1. Introduction to Computers, programming language a. C language history 2. Variables constants and declarations 3. Arithmetic, relational and logical operators. a. Precedence order 4. Control flow statements a. For loop b. While loop c. If, If-else d. Switch 5. Arrays a. One dimensional and two dimensional arrays 6. Characters and strings 7. Functions a. Pass by value, pass by reference b. Recursive functions c. Scope of variables 8. Sorting algorithms a. Selection sort b. Insertion sort 9. Introduction to pointers a. Basic pointers b. Pointers to arrays and two dimensional arrays c. Pointer arithmetic d. Malloc, stack vs heap 10. Structures a. Basic introduction b. Pointers to structures c. Basic linked lists 11. File processing (IO processing) a. Opening, closing and reading files b. Structured and Unstructured file reading Text Books : The C programming language by Kerninghan and Ritche Reference Books : The C programming language by Kerninghan and Ritche | 12 | 3 - 0 - 3 - 0 - 6 - 12 |

7 | EE1103 | Numerical Methods Course No : EE1103Course Title : Numerical MethodsPre Requisite : Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 6Total Hours PerWeek : 12Description : Introduction to simple numerical methods that are commonly used by engineers. The focus is on developing programming skills in C, C++ . This course is meant for students who have previously had some exposure to programming in their high school, and have opted out of CS1100. Course Content : Numerical methods involving methods for finding the roots of an equation (bisection, Newton-Raphson), solutions to ordinary differential equations (Euler, Runge-Kutta, explicit and implicit methods), matrix methods (Gauss elimination, LU decomposition), interpolation (linear, cubic spline), and iterative methods. Case studies from engineering disciplines will be used to illustrate the applicability of these methods, with a discussion on sources of numerical errors. Text Books : Numerical Methods for Engineers, Chapra and Canale, 6th edition Reference Books : Online course materials | 12 | 3 - 0 - 3 - 0 - 6 - 12 |

8 | EE2001 | Digital Systems & Lab Course No : EE2001Course Title : Digital Systems & LabPre Requisite : Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 6Total Hours PerWeek : 16Description : At the end of this course, the student should be able to:1. understand number systems2. implement and analyse digital systems based on combinational and sequential logic3. understand and design state machines4. design systems using RTL Course Content : 1. Introduction to Digital Systems and Boolean AlgebraBinary, octal and hexadecimal number systems; Truth table; Basic logic operation and logic gates. Basic postulates and fundamental theorems of Boolean algebra; Canonical (SOP and POS) forms2. Logic Minimization and ImplementationMinterm and Maxterm expansions; - Karnaugh-maps, essential prime implicants, incompletely specified functions, NAND and NOR implementation, Quine-McCluskey method; Switch level representation and realization using transistors; Logic families – TTL, CMOS3. Combinational Logic Multi level gate circuits, Decoders, encoders, multiplexers, demultiplexers and their applications; Parity circuits and comparators; Representation of signed numbers; Adders, Ripple carry. Introduction to HDL ( VHDL /Verilog), HDL description of combinational circuits.4. Sequential LogicLatches and flip-flops: SR-latch, D-latch, D flip-flop, JK flip-flop, T flip-flop; Setup and Hold parameters, timing analysis; Registers and counters; Shift register; Ripple counter, Synchronous counter design using D, T, and JK flip flops. HDL description of sequential circuits.5. State Machine Design State machine as a sequential controller; Moore and Mealy state machines; Derivation of state graph and tables; Sequence detector; state table reduction using Implication table; state assignment, logic realization; equivalent state machines, Designing state machine using ASM charts. state machine modeling based on HDL.6. Memory and Programmable Logic DevicesROM and RAM; Sequential PLDs and their applications; State- machine design with sequential PLDs; FPGAs7. Register transfer language: Notation, HDL features for RTL, Digital design at the RTL level, Simple design of a microcontroller using RTL.8. Advanced TopicsAsynchronous Sequential Machines, Static and Dynamic hazards; race free design; testing digital circuits.Syllabus: LaboratoryExperiments on design of combinational circuits including adders and magnitude comparators; realization using multiplexers and other approaches; identification of critical path Design of sequential circuits including flip-flops, counters and registers Digital to analog converter design and study of characteristicsExperiments on motor control using flip-flops and gates Introduction to hardware description languages and simulation of simple circuits Text Books : 1. Morris. M. Mano, Michael D. Ciletti, Digital Design, Fourth Edition, Prentice-Hall India. 2008.2. Charles. H. Roth, Jr., Fundamentals of Logic Design, Fifth Edition, Thomson Brooks /Cole, 2005. 3. S. Palnitkar, Verilog HDL: A Guide to Digital Design and Synthesis, Second Edition, Pearson Education, 2004. Reference Books : 1. S. Brown and Z. Vranesic, Fundamentals of digital logic with Verilog design, ThirdEdition, McGraw-Hill, 2013 2. Charles. H. Roth, Jr., Digital System Design using VHDL, Indian Edition, Thomson Brooks /Cole, 2006. 3. Mohammad A.Karim, Xinghao Chen, Digital Design, CRC press 2008.4. J.F. Wakerly, Digital Design: Principles and Practices, Fourth Edition, Prentice Hall, 2005 | 16 | 3 - 1 - 6 - 0 - 6 - 16 |

9 | EE2004 | Digital Signal Processing Course No : EE2004Course Title : Digital Signal ProcessingPre Requisite : EE1101 Signals and SystemsExtended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 7Total Hours PerWeek : 0Description : To teach the fundamentals of Digital Signal Processing Course Content : Review of Signals and Systems: Discrete time complex exponentials and other basic signals—scaling of the independent axis and differences from its continuous-time counterpart—system properties (linearity, time-invariance, memory, causality, BIBO stability)—LTI systems described by linear constant coefficient difference equations (LCCDE)—impulse response and convolution. Discrete-Time Fourier Transform (DTFT): Complex exponentials as eigensignals of LTI systems—DTFT definition—inversion formula—properties—relationship to continuous-time Fourier series (CTFS). Z-Transform: Generalized complex exponentials as eigensignals of LTI systems—z-transform definition—region of convergence (RoC)—properties of RoC—properties of the z-transform—inverse z-transform methods (partial fraction expansion, power series method, contour integral approach)—pole-zero plots—time-domain responses of simple pole-zero plots—RoC implications of causality and stability. Frequency Domain Analysis of LTI Systems: Frequency response of systems with rational transfer function—definitions of magnitude and phase response—geometric method of frequency response evaluation from pole-zero plot—frequency response of single complex zero/pole—frequency response of simple configurations (second order resonator, notch filter, averaging filter, comb filter, allpass systems)—phase response—definition of principal phase—zero-phase response—group delay—phase response of single complex zero/pole—extension to higher order systems—effect of a unit circle zero on the phase response—zero-phase response representation of systems with rational transfer function—minimum phase and allpass systems—constant group delay and its consequences—generalized linear phase—conditions that have to be met for a filter to have generalized linear phase—four types of linear phase FIR filters—on the zero locations of a linear phase FIR filter—constrained zeros at z = 1 and at z = -1 and their implications on choice of filters Type I through Type IV when designing filters—frequency response expressions for Type I through Type IV filters. Sampling: Impulse train sampling—relationship between impulse trained sampled continuous-time signal spectrum and the DTFT of its discrete-time counterpart—scaling of the frequency axis—relationship between true frequency and digital frequency—reconstruction through sinc interpolation—aliasing—effect of sampling at a discontinuous point—relationship between analog and digital sinc—effects of oversampling—discrete-time processing of continuous-time signals. Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT): Definition of the DFT and inverse DFT—relationship to discrete-time Fourier series—matrix representation—DFT as the samples of the DTFT and the implied periodicity of the time-domain signal—recovering the DTFT from the DFT—circular shift of signal and the "index mod N" concept—properties of the DFT—circular convolution and its relationship with linear convolution—effect of zero padding—introduction to the Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) algorithm—decimation-in-time and decimation-in-frequency algorithms. Text Books : Discrete-Time Signal Processing by Alan V. Oppenheim and Ronald W. Schafer, 3rd edition, 2010, Prentice Hall, Upper Saddle River, NJ. Reference Books : (1) Digital Signal Processing by John G. Proakis and Dimitris K. Manolakis, 4th edition, 2007, Prentice Hall, Upper Saddle River, NJ. (2) Digital Signal Processing by Sanjit Mitra, 4th edition, 2011, McGraw-Hill, New York, NY. | 11 | 3 - 1 - 0 - 0 - 7 - 0 |

10 | EE2005 | Electrical Machines and Lab Course No : EE2005Course Title : Electrical Machines and LabPre Requisite : EE2015Extended Tutorial: 1Outside Class Hours : 7Total Hours PerWeek : 15Description : Learning Objectives: Familiarisation of the student with the basics of construction, theory and operation of electrical machines and transformers. Learning Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student is expected to be able to (a) understand and differentiate between the basic varieties of machines / transformers and their relevance in applications (b) understand the basic nameplate specifications of a machine / transformer (c) Analyze and quantify the performance of machines / transformers in simple applications and arrive at performance metrics (d) understand the principles of control and operation of machines and transformers Course Content : Course Contents (Theory): Review of magnetic circuits; Transformers: construction, equivalent circuit, parameter estimation – no-load and short circuit tests, regulation, parallel operation, per-unit notation, three-phase transformers: construction and operation. Autotransformers. DC Machines: construction and principles of operation, equivalent circuit, performance equations, generator and motor operation, series/shunt connections, speed-torque curves, principles of speed control as motor. Induction machines: construction and principles of operation, equivalent circuit, parameter estimation – no-load and blocked rotor tests, speed-torque curves, principles of speed control, elements of generator operation, performance assessment. Synchronous machines: construction and principles of operation, equivalent circuit, parameter estimation, armature reaction, performance assessment, regulation, synchronization and grid connected operation of cylindrical rotor machines Course Contents (Lab): Experiments to relate the theory and practice dealing with transformers, DC Machines, Induction Machines and Synchronous Machines. Text Books : 1. Fitzgerald, Kingsley and Umans, Electric Machinery, sixth edition, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2002. 2. Nagrath and Kothari, Electric Machines, Fourth edition, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2010. 3. Stephen J Chapman, Electric Machinery Fundamentals, Fourth Edition, McGraw Hill, Singapore 2005. 4. John Hindmarsh, Electric Machines and their Applications, Pergamon Press, London, 1977. Reference Books : None. | 15 | 3 - 1 - 3 - 1 - 7 - 15 |

11 | EE2015 | Electric Circuits & Networks Course No : EE2015Course Title : Electric Circuits & Networks Pre Requisite : EE1101 - Signals and systemsExtended Tutorial: 1Outside Class Hours : 6Total Hours PerWeek : 0Description : 1) Analysis of electric circuits in time and Laplace domain 2) Analysis of single phase and three-phase circuits in sinusoidal steady state. 3) Introduction to transfer functions, frequency response and Bode plots 4) Understand significance of complex power Course Content : Current and voltage, I-V relationship for ideal sources, R, C, L, M, controlled sources in time and Laplace/frequency domain, complex impedance and admittance. Nodal and Mesh Analysis in time and Laplace domain, Superposition, Transient analysis of electrical networks, Time-domain response of 1st and 2nd order RC, RL and RLC circuits, frequency response, Bode plots, poles and zeros. Sinusoidal steady state analysis, phasors, response to periodic inputs, power and energy. Thevenin and Norton equivalents Linear two port networks and network theorems Complex power Quality factor, locus diagrams 3-phase systems Text Books : 1. Hayt, Kemmerly, and Durbin, Engineering Circuit Analysis, 8th Edition, McGraw Hill 2012 (Indian Edition). 2. Lathi, Linear systems and signals. Reference Books : None | 11 | 3 - 1 - 0 - 1 - 6 - 0 |

12 | EE2016 | Microprocessor Theory+Lab Course No : EE2016Course Title : Microprocessor Theory+LabPre Requisite : EE2001Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 7Total Hours PerWeek : 12Description : To introduce students to assembly language programming To introduce students to the general design of a microprocessor and peripherals To introduce students to the archetecture of the ARM processor To program the ARM processor for various simple tasks Course Content : Concept of a bus. Registers as fast memory. address and data buses. Latency and throughput Caching memory accesses. Cache algorithms. Multilevel caches. Interrupt processing. CPU communication with peripherals. Impact on execution speed DMA Overview of the design of the ARM archetecture Introduction to ARM assembly language The lab experiments will introduce students to assembly language programming and embedded programming. Students will create embedded programs on an ARM processor to generate analog traces, control motors, interface to peripherals and use of the I2C bus. Advanced experiments may explore performance issues. Text Books : Stallings, William, "Computer Organization and Architecture" 9th Ed, from Pearson Publishers Lab manuals Online ARM programming reference and guide Reference Books : None | 12 | 2 - 0 - 3 - 0 - 7 - 12 |

13 | EE2019 | Analog Systems and Lab Course No : EE2019Course Title : Analog Systems and LabPre Requisite : EE2015, EE1101Extended Tutorial: 1Outside Class Hours : 10Total Hours PerWeek : 17Description : Course Objectives: Learning various fundamental concepts of analog systems such as open loop system, Active-RC Analog Filters, Op-amp based building blocks, feedback theory, stability of a closed loop system, compensation, voltage and current regulation, etc. Applying the above concepts in building an analog system prototype. Learning Outcomes: By the end of this course, students should be able to understand the fundamental concepts of analog systems and applying the same in real world applications. Course Content : Basics of operational amplifier, op-amp based building blocks, linear and non-linear system, feedback theory, negative/positive feedback, stability criterion, bode plot with gain and phase margin, compensation, passive and active-RC analog filters, RLC filters, voltage and current regulators, pulse width modulation, AC coupling input and output and oscillators. Text Books : Microelectronic Circuits: Theory and Applications (International Version) Paperback – 11 Mar 2013 by A. Sedra, K. Smith, A. Chandorkar Publisher: Oxford; Sixth edition (11 March 2013) ISBN-13: 978-0198089131 Reference Books : Class notes and lab manual | 17 | 3 - 1 - 3 - 1 - 10 - 17 |

14 | EE2025 | Engineering Electromagnetics Course No : EE2025Course Title : Engineering ElectromagneticsPre Requisite : Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 6Total Hours PerWeek : 0Description : This course will provide an exposure to the basic concepts of engineering electromagnetics and its latest applications. Course Content : 1. Static/Quasi-Static E & M Fields: (i) Poisson's and Laplace's equations, Uniqueness theorem, General Procedure for Solving Poisson's or Laplace's Equation, (ii) Resistance and Capacitance (Examples of MEMS and P-N junction), (iii) Magnetic Fields, Inductors and Inductance, (iv) Electric- and Magnetic Field Systems (Concept of distributed elements)2. Transmission Lines: (i) Equations of current and voltage, (ii) Standing waves and impedance transformation, (iii) Power transfer on a transmission line, (iv) Loss-less and low-loss transmission lines, (v) Discontinuity, Bounce diagram and Digital transmission lines.3. EM Waves and Waveguides: (i) Wave equation and plane-wave solution, (ii) Energy conservation and Poyenting theorem, (iii) Wave propagation in loss-less and lossy media, (iv) Waves at the interface (Fresnel's Equation, TIR, Brewester's Angle, Skin Depth), (v) Parallel plane waveguide and TEM modes, (vi) Rectangular Waveguides and Resonators, (v) Optical Waveguides, Fiber Optics and Optical Communications. Text Books : Elements of Electromagnetics By Mthew N.O. Sadiku (Oxford)2. Elements of Engineering Electromagnetics By N.N. Rao (Pearson)\\ Reference Books : Engineering Electromagnetics By W.H. Hayt (McGraw-Hill)2. Field and Wave Electromagnetics By David. K. Cheng (Pearson) | 10 | 3 - 1 - 0 - 0 - 6 - 0 |

15 | EE2703 | Applied Programming Lab Course No : EE2703Course Title : Applied Programming LabPre Requisite : CS1100Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 3Total Hours PerWeek : 6Description : After finishing this course students will * have a working knowledge of scientific python * able to do linear Least Squares fitting * able to model and simulate simple systems * have a practical knowledge of signal processing Course Content : * Introduction to Scientific Python * Least Squares * Simulating in time - Tubelight * Simulating a device - Laplace's equation, ampere's law * Using the system module to solve for step and impulse response of op-amp circuits * Using the DFT to obtain steady state response of linear (and op-amp) circuits * Simulating noise in circuits * Low pass filtering of signals using digital filters. Effect on SNR Text Books : Class assignment notes Internet sources for Python and Scientific Python Discrete-time Signal Processing, A.V. Oppenheim and R.W. Schafer, 3rd edition, Prentice-Hall, 2010. Reference Books : None | 6 | 0 - 0 - 3 - 0 - 3 - 6 |

16 | EE3001 | Solid State Devices Course No : EE3001Course Title : Solid State DevicesPre Requisite : Extended Tutorial: 1Outside Class Hours : 6Total Hours PerWeek : 11Description : In the last 50 years, solid state devices served as the foundation of the digital revolution which has affected all aspects of our modern life. Although fabrication of these devices is a complex process that requires close collaboration of specialists from different disciplines, the working principles of most of these devices can be learnt at the junior undergraduate level. The first part of this introductory course is to understand how material properties are affected under equilibrium and no Course Content : Solid state devices – History and its relevance in modern worldSolids, Crystals and Electronic grade materialsFormation of energy bands in solidsConcept of hole, Density of states and Fermi levelIntrinsic and extrinsic semiconductorsEquilibrium Carrier concentrationDirect and indirect semiconductorsRecombination and Generation of carriers,Carrier transport – Drift and DiffusionEquations of state – Continuity and Poisson equationpn junction – energy band diagram, derivation of dc and ac characteristicsBipolar junction transistors – physics and characteristicsMOS capacitorMOSFET – physics, characteristics and modelingOther devices: LEDs, Solar cells, metal-semiconductor junctions, solid state memories Text Books : [1] Robert Pierret, “Semiconductor Device Fundamentals,” Pearson Education, 2006[2] B. G. Streetman and S. K. Banerjee, “Solid State Electronic Devices,” Prentice Hall India, 2014[3] M. S. Tyagi, “Introduction to Semiconductor Materials and Devices”, John Wiley, 2004 Reference Books : [1] Robert Pierret, “Advanced Semiconductor Fundamentals,” Pearson, 2003[2] C.T. Sah, “Fundamentals of Solid State Electronics”, World Scientific Publishing, 1991[3] Amitava DasGupta and Nandita DasGupta, “Semiconductor Devices: Modelling And Technology”, Prentice Hall India, 2004[4] S. Karmalkar, “Solid state devices”, NPTEL video lectures available on youtube; transcripts available at http://textofvideo.nptel.iitm.ac.in/video.php?courseId=117106091 | 11 | 3 - 1 - 0 - 1 - 6 - 11 |

17 | EE3002 | Analog Circuits Course No : EE3002Course Title : Analog CircuitsPre Requisite : EE1001, EE2002Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 6Total Hours PerWeek : 10Description : Learning objectives:This course is an introduction to amplifiers using transistors. Students will be introduced to MOS transistors, their characteristics, techniques for biasing them, and amplifiers using them. The basic transistor amplifier stages are seen as realizations of different controlled sources using negative feedback. Small- and large-signal characteristics of each amplifier will be discussed. Frequency ompensation techniques to stabilise higher order systems will be discussed.Learning Outcomes:At the end of this course, students should be able to recognize and analyze the basic amplifiers and biasing arrangements using MOS or bipolar transistors. Students should also be able to perform dominant-pole compensation of higher order systems and stabilise them. Course Content : 1) MOS transistor characteristics; small signal model2) Common source amplifier, frequency response, Miller effect3) Introduction to negative feedback; Closed loop behavior of first, second and third order systems in a feedback loop; Gain and Phase margin4) Dominant pole compensation; Pole splitting5) Controlled sources using MOS transistors and opamps6) Swing limits of amplifiers7) pMOS transistor; Active load; CMOS inverter; Differential pair8) Single stage and Two stage opamps; Miller compensation;9) Bipolar junction transistor Text Books : 1) Microelectronic Circuits: Theory and ApplicationsAuthors: Adel S. Sedra, Kenneth C. Smith and Arun N. ChandorkarPublisher: Oxford; Sixth edition (11 March 2013)ISBN-10: 0198089139ISBN-13: 978-0198089131 Reference Books : None. | 10 | 3 - 1 - 0 - 0 - 6 - 10 |

18 | EE3003 | Power Systems Course No : EE3003Course Title : Power SystemsPre Requisite : EE2005Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 6Total Hours PerWeek : 10Description : This course is a first course on power systems for under graduates. Here the students are introduced to modeling of different components of power systems and several tools for analyzing the system. Course Content : Introduction to Power Systems: Historical developments, performance requirements, typical power station and substation layout, single line diagram, conventional and non-conventional electrical energy sources-recent trends. Transmission and Distribution Systems: overhead lines, insulators, underground cables, distribution systems. Power system analysis: Modeling of power system components, basics of load flow analysis, power system stability. Power system protection: Switchgear, fuses, circuit breakers, symmetrical fault calculations-basic principles of protection relays. Economics of power supply system: Economic load dispatch without losses, unit commitment. Text Books : 1. Power system Analysis: John J. Grainger and William D. Stevenson, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2003 2. Power system analysis: Hadi Saadat, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2002 Reference Books : 1. Electrical energy systems theory an introduction: Olle l. Elgerd, T M H Edition 2. Power system stability and control: P. Kundur, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2006. 3. Power system engineering: I. J. Nagrath and D. P. Kothari, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2005. | 10 | 3 - 1 - 0 - 0 - 6 - 10 |

19 | EE3004 | Control Engineering Course No : EE3004Course Title : Control EngineeringPre Requisite : Extended Tutorial: 1Outside Class Hours : 6Total Hours PerWeek : 0Description : This course shall introduce the fundamentals of modeling and control of linear time invariant systems; primarily from the classical viewpoint of Laplace transforms and a brief emphasis on the state space formulation as well. The course will be useful for students from major streams of engineering to build foundations of time/frequency analysis of systems as well as the feedback control of such systems. Course Content : 1. Open-loop and closed-loop systems: Mathematical Models for Physical Systems:Electrical circuits, dc generator and motors, Mechanical systems, computational systems. Linearization of nonlinear systems. Transfer function representation.2. Transient Response: Typical inputs; Time-domain specifications; Steady stateerrors; error series, system error and Non-unity feedback systems.3. Concept of stability; necessary and sufficient conditions for stability; BIBO stability,Routh-Hurwitz criterion; Root locus plots, relative stability.4. Frequency response; Bode plots; Frequency domain specifications: Gain Marginand phase Margin; Nyquist plot: Nyquist stability criterion;5. Controller Design: basics of the proportional, derivative and integral actions, lead lag compensators: via root locus and frequency domain methods.6. State-variable representation of systems: Solution of state equations, stability,controllability and observability, pole placement. Text Books : Modern Control Engineering, 5th Edition, by Katsuhiko Ogata. Reference Books : 1. Farid Golnaraghi and Benjamin C Kuo, Automatic Control Systems, 9th Edition, John Wiley and Sons2. I. J. Nagrath and M. Gopal, Control Systems Engineering, 4th Ed., New age international publishers.3. D’Azzo and Houpis, Feedback Control Systems, Analysis and Synthesis, 19884. Richard M. Murray and Karl J. Astrom, Feedback Systems: An introduction forScientists and Engineers, Princeton University Press, 2010. | 11 | 3 - 1 - 0 - 1 - 6 - 0 |

20 | EE3005 | Communication Systems Course No : EE3005Course Title : Communication SystemsPre Requisite : EE1101 Signals and SystemsExtended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 6Total Hours PerWeek : 0Description : Objectives: (i) an understanding of baseband and passband signals and channels, modulation formats appropriate for these channels, (ii) random processes and noise, (iii) a systematic framework for optimum demodulation based on signal space concepts, performance analysis and power-bandwidth tradeoffs for common modulation schemes Course Content : (1) Review of Signals and Systems -- Linear time-invariant systems, Fourier series, Fourier transform, Bandwidth, Baseband and passband signals, complex baseband representation of passband signals (2) Amplitude Modulation (AM) -- Double Sideband - Suppressed carrier AM, Conventional AM, Single sideband AM, Vestigial sideband AM, Quadrature AM (3) Angle Modulation -- Phase modulation (PM), Frequency modulation (FM), FM spectrum, Phase-locked loops (4) Signal space representation -- Gram-Schmidt orthogonalization, orthogonal expansion of signals and approximation, vector representation, vector representation of channels (5) Review of Probability -- Probability basics, Random variables, Random vectors, Independence of random variables, Moments, correlation matrix, covariance matrixGaussian random vectors -- Scaling and translation, Standard Gaussian, Joint Gaussianity, linear transformation of jointly Gaussian random vectors (6) Random processes -- Basic definitions, Second-order statistics, Wide-sense stationarity and stationarity, Power spectral density, Gaussian random processes, Noise modeling, Filtering, Projection of Gaussian noise onto a signal space (7) Binary modulation on the additive white Gaussian noise channel, Reduction to binary hypothesis testing Text Books : U. Madhow, "Introduction to Communication Systems," Cambridge University Press, 2014. Chapters 1-6 Reference Books : S. Haykin, Communication Systems, Wiley, 2006. | 10 | 3 - 1 - 0 - 0 - 6 - 0 |

21 | EE3006 | Principles of Measurement Course No : EE3006Course Title : Principles of MeasurementPre Requisite : NIlExtended Tutorial: 3Outside Class Hours : 3Total Hours PerWeek : 8Description : To enable an engineer to make proper measurements and become aware of the principles behind such 'proper measurements'. The laboratory part of the course provides an opportunity to practice what was learnt in the theory course. Course Content : SI Units, significant digits; Errors in Measurements – Systematic and random errors, propagation of errors; Analog Indicating Instrument – The PMMC meter; Analog Indicating Instrument – The MI meter; Analog Indicating Instrument – The ED type meter; Analog Indicating Instrument – Miscellaneous; Digital methods of measurement – The counter-timer; Digital methods of measurement – Analog to digital converters; Digital methods of measurement – Digital multimeter; Digital methods of measurement – DAQ systems; PC based measurement techniques; Graphical methods of measurement – CRO, DSO; Null balance method – Potentiometers – dc and ac; Bridges dc and ac; Voltage and current scaling – CT/ VT and CVT Text Books : 1. Helfrick and Cooper, Modern Electronic Instrumentation and Measurement Techniques, Prentice-Hall.2. Ernest Frank, Electrical measurement analysis, McGraw Hill, New York Reference Books : Golding and Widdis, Electrical measurements and measuring instruments, Wheeler Publishing House, New Delhi. | 8 | 2 - 0 - 0 - 3 - 3 - 8 |

22 | EE3007 | RF and Optical Communication Course No : EE3007Course Title : RF and Optical CommunicationPre Requisite : Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 6Total Hours PerWeek : 9Description : To introduce Physical Layer link design, both in microwave and optical communication links Course Content : Basic requirements of Communication Link: Modulation, Power, Transmitter and Receiver Gain, Noise, SNR. Noise in channel vs Noise in Receiver RF Link Design Receivers and Transmitters: Radiation patterns, power,bandwidth, noise The RF channel: multipath, curvature of earth Near Field RF link. Inductive coupling with RFID antennas, readers Short Range communications Zigbee, Bluetooth, Bluetooth Low Energy (BLE): Link design Long range communications Wireless links: Multipath, fading, attenuation, link design, case study Satellite links: Effect of ionosphere, atmosphere. Link design, case studies Ultra long links: Communicating across the solar system - link design for the deep space probes sent out by NASA. Optical communication: Sources: Modulation, power, beam spreading, beam wander Receivers: Sensitivity, noise, bandwidth Channel: Bandwidth, Fibre or free space, Channel noise, Turbulence, Fog Optical link design basics Free Space link design, case studies. Fog and free space optical links Optical Fibre Communication basics. Link design of a fibre link. Cost per bit for Copper, RF and Optical links vs distance and Bitrate RF over Optical links: Microwave Photonics Transporting analog RF over Optical links Text Books : Telecommunication Transmission Systems by Robert G. Winch (McGraw Hill, 1993/1998) Reference Books : Principles of LED Light Communications: Towards Networked LiFi by Svilen Dimitrov, Harald Hass Fundamentals of Microwave Photonics by V.J. Urick, Keith J. Williams, Jason D. McKinney (Wiley) | 9 | 3 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 6 - 9 |

23 | EE3110 | Probability Foundations for Electrical Engineers Course No : EE3110Course Title : Probability Foundations for Electrical EngineersPre Requisite :
Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 8Total Hours PerWeek : 12Description : To introduce probabilistic reasoning at advanced UG level, with examples from EE Course Content : Introduction to Probability: Sets, Events, Axioms of Probability, Conditional Probability and Independence, Bayes Theorem and MAP Decision Rule Random Variables: Definitions, Cumulative Distribution Functions, mass and density functions, joint and conditional distributions, Functions of Random Variables Expectations: Mean, Variance, Moments, Correlation, Chebychev and Schwarz Inequalities, Moment-generating and Characteristic Functions, Chernoff Bounds, Conditional Expectations Random Vectors: Jointly Gaussian random variables, Covariance Matrices, Linear Transformations, Diagonalization of Covariance Matrices Random Sequences: Sequences of independent random variables, correlation functions, wide-sense stationary sequences, LTI filtering of sequences Law of Large Numbers, Central Limit Theorem Text Books : Bertsekas and Tsitsiklis: Introduction to Probability, 2nd Ed, 2008, Athena Scientific Reference Books : Stark and Woods: Probability and Random Processes with Applications to Signal Processing, 3rd ed 2002, Pearson Education | 12 | 3 - 1 - 0 - 0 - 8 - 12 |

24 | EE3203 | Power Electronics Course No : EE3203Course Title : Power ElectronicsPre Requisite : NoneExtended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 6Total Hours PerWeek : 10Description : To introduce B.Tech and DD students to basics of Power Electronics. The student will learn about the devices used for power electronic applications and the circuit topologies used for rectification (ac to dc), conversion (dc to dc), inversion (dc to ac) and cyclo-conversion (ac to ac). This course is a pre-requisite for advanced courses related to power electronics. Course Content : Introduction Features of Power Processing Systems: Ideal DC and AC waveforms; DC figures of merit – ripple factor and average value; AC figures of merit – harmonic factor, distortion factor, THD, power factor, crest factor. Semiconductor Devices: SCR – static v-i characteristics, dynamic characteristics, commutation, turn-on methods; Power Diode; Power MOSFET; IGBT. Simple Power Electronic Circuits: SCR circuits with R load, RL load, RL load and freewheeling diode – continuous and discontinuous modes of operation. Rectifiers: Single phase diode bridge – R load, constant dc-side current, effect of source inductance, constant dc-side voltage; Three phase diode full-bridge with constant dc-side current – ideal circuit, effect of source inductance; Single phase full-controlled thyristor bridge – constant dc-side current, effect of source inductance, inverter mode of operation; Three phase full-controlled thyristor bridge – constant dc-side current, effect of source inductance; Higher pulse rectifiers. Converters: Basic non-isolated topologies: Buck, boost, buck-boost and cuk converters – steady state analysis under continuous and discontinuous modes of operation; Steady state analysis of a few isolated topologies. Inverters: Pulse-width-modulated inverters – sine-triangle modulation, single phase half-bridge inverter, single phase full-bridge inverter – unipolar and bipolar schemes, three phase inverters; Square wave inverters – single phase and three phase (180 degree mode of operation); Effect of blanking time; Other inverter control techniques – single phase output control by voltage cancellation, Selective Harmonic Elimination (SHE), hysteresis control; AC Voltage Controllers: Configuration and basic operation, application. Text Books : 1. Mohan N, Undeland TM. Power electronics: converters, applications, and design. John Wiley & Sons; 2007. 2. Erickson RW, Maksimovic D. Fundamentals of power electronics. Springer Science & Business Media; 2007. Reference Books : 1. Rashid MH. Power electronics: circuits, devices, and applications. Pearson Education India; 2009. 2. Bimbhra PS, Kaur S. Power electronics. Khanna publishers; 2012. | 10 | 3 - 1 - 0 - 0 - 6 - 10 |

25 | EE3301 | Introduction to Semiconductor Devices Course No : EE3301Course Title : Introduction to Semiconductor DevicesPre Requisite : Extended Tutorial: Outside Class Hours : Total Hours PerWeek : Description : This is the first course of the proposed new minor stream "Microelectronics". The basic properties of Semiconductor Materials and Devices will be discussed in this. Course Content : Properties of semiconductor: Concept of free carriers (electrons and holes), intrinsic and extrinsic semiconductor, ionization of impurities, concepts of mobility, excess carriers, generation-recombination and lifetime. Charge transport in semiconductor: Drift and diffusion, continuity equation p-n junction: Energy band diagram under thermal equilibrium and with applied bias, concept of space charge layer, built-in potential, current-voltage and capacitance voltage characteristics, junction breakdown. Bipolar Junction Transistor: Four different modes of operation, CE, CB and CC configurations, input-output characteristics MOSFET: 2-terminal MOS structure, threshold voltage, C-V characteristics, MOSFET I-V characteristics Text Books : 1. Solid State Devices by Ben G.Streetman and Sanjay Banerjee, Pearson Prentice Hall 2. Semiconductor Devices Physics and Technology by S.M.Sze, John Wiley and Sons 3. Semiconductor Devices Modelling and Technology by Nandita DasGupta and Amitava DasGupta, Prentice Hall of India Pvt.Ltd. Reference Books : 1. Physics of Semiconductor Devices by S.M.Sze, John Wiley and Sons 2. Introduction to Semiconductor Materials and Devices by M.S.Tyagi, John Wiley and Sons | 9 | - - - - - |

26 | EE3313 | Device Modelling Course No : EE3313Course Title : Device ModellingPre Requisite : EE3001 or EE3301Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 6Total Hours PerWeek : 0Description : 1.Augmentation of the knowledge of basic semiconductor materials and devices and to learn about various important phenomena not discussed in the first level course 2. Analytical modelling of semiconductor devices considering the above effects Course Content : Basic Semiconductor Physics: SRH and Auger models of recombination; Heavy doping and bandgap narrowing; Avalanche multiplication; MOSFET Modelling : Analysis of threshold voltage in ideal and non-ideal conditions; Threshold voltage and body effect; Long channel models for drain current; effect of non-uniform doping in the channel; channel length modulation and dynamic operation; short channel and small geometry effects; subthreshold charges and currents; small signal analysis; modeling of SOI MOSFET Bipolar Transistor Modelling: Ebers-Moll model; stored charge and capacitances in BJT; derivation of fT from small signal equivalent circuit; graded base doping; variation of ? with collector current; high injection effects in collector; heavy doping effects in emitter; Gummel-Poon model; current crowding; polysilicon emitter transistor Heterojunction Devices: Concept of heterojunction; Modelling of heterostructure devices e.g. HBT and HEMT Text Books : 1. Streetman and Banerjee, “Solid State Electronic Devices”, Prentice-Hall 2. Donald Neamen, “Semiconductor Device and Physics”, Tata McGraw-Hill 3. M.S.Tyagi, “Introduction to Semiconductor Materials and Devices’, Wiley India Pvt.Ltd. 4. N.DasGupta and A. DasGupta, “Semiconductor Devices Modelling and Technology”, PHI Learning Pvt.Ltd. 5. S. Karmalkar, NPTEL Video lectures, “Solid State Devices” http://nptel.ac.in/courses/117106091/, transcripts available at http://textofvideo.nptel.iitm.ac.in/video.php?courseId=117106091 Reference Books : 1. David Roulston, “Bipolar Semiconductor Devices”, McGraw-Hill 2. Y. Tsividis and C. Mcandrew “Operation and Modelling of the MOS Transistor”, Oxford Series in Electrical and Computer Engineering | 10 | 3 - 1 - 0 - 0 - 6 - 0 |

27 | EE3402 | Sensing Techniques and Sensor Systems Course No : EE3402Course Title : Sensing Techniques and Sensor SystemsPre Requisite : EE3006Extended Tutorial: 1Outside Class Hours : 6Total Hours PerWeek : 11Description : Objectives: • To understand the underlying principles and performance characteristics of important sensors • To learn how to design the interfacing circuits for these sensors. • To get acquainted with the process of developing and evaluating measurement systems for industrial and scientific applications. Course Content : Course Contents: Sensors: Types and characteristics. Mechanical and acoustic sensors: metallic, thin-film and semiconductor strain gauges, silicon pressure sensors, accelerometers, displacement transducers, piezo junction devices, piezoelectric field-effect transducers, surface acoustic wave devices, ultrasonic based sensors, flow sensors. Magnetic and Electric field sensors: Sensors based on variable magnetic coupling, search coil, magnetoresistors, Hall-effect devices, integrated Hall devices, flux-gate sensors, solid-state read and write heads, electrostatic sensors and applications. Light-sensitive sensors: photovoltaic diodes, photoconductors, photodiodes, phototransistors, positron-sensitive photodetectors, opto-isolators, photodiode arrays, charge-coupled devices, fiber-optic sensor technologies and applications. Thermal sensors: Platinum resistors, thermistors, silicon transistor thermometers, integrated temperature transducers, thermocouples. Interface electronics: Noise analysis, electronic circuits designed to interface directly with the sensing elements, linearization, A/D conversion, temperature compensation. Current, frequency, period or pulse-width modulation conversion, microcomputer/microcontroller interfacing. Sensor systems and applications: integrated sensors-actuators, microsystems, sensor buses, multiple-sensor systems, sensor networks and automotive, consumer, power, medical measurement systems. Text Books : Text Books: Pallas-Areny Ramon, John G. Webster. Sensors and signal conditioning. New York: Wiley, 2001. Reference Books : Reference Books: 1. De Silva, Clarence W. Sensors and actuators: Engineering system instrumentation. CRC Press, 2015. 2. Ripka, Pavel, Alois Tipek, eds. Modern sensors handbook. John Wiley & Sons, 2013. 3. Khazan, Alexander D. Transducers and their elements: design and application. Prentice Hall, 1994. 4. Fraden, Jacob. Handbook of modern sensors: physics, designs, and applications. Springer Science & Business Media, 2004. 5. Tumanski, Slawomir. Handbook of magnetic measurements. CRC Press, 2016. | 11 | 3 - 1 - 0 - 1 - 6 - 11 |

28 | EE4131 | Analog and Digital Filters Course No : EE4131Course Title : Analog and Digital FiltersPre Requisite : EE1101,EE2004Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 6Total Hours PerWeek : 0Description : To introduce filter design to undergraduate students. At the end of the course they should be able to divide the filtering between the analog and digital sections and design each to meet the system specifications Course Content : stability and realizability conditions for rational functions in s-domain. Synthesis of impedence networks and single-ended 2-port networks. Butterworth, Chebyshev and Bessel Filters. Transformation to high pass and band pass filters. Filter design. Non-linearity of phase and its consequences. Filter delay Review of Sampling of analog signals and aliasing. Mapping analog filters to digital domain via sampling. Impulse invariant and Bilinear transformation techniques. IIR filters in digital domain. Pole-Zero placement and implications. The filter design problem - dividing the work between analog and digital sections Oversampling to simplify the analog filter FIR filters. Requirements. Linearity of phase. Obtaining FIR filter from specified frequency response. Need for windowing. Gibbs phenomenon and its impact on stop-band attenuation and pass-band ripple. Rect, Triangular, Hanning and Kaiser windows FIR filter design using Kaiser windows Differentiating, high pass and band pass filters Combined analog and digital filter design to meet system specifications Introduction to optimal FIR filter design. Text Books : Text Books: 1. Franklin F. Kuo, Network Analysis and Synthesis, 2nd Ed, Wiley Student Edition (2001). 2. Discrete-Time Signal Processing by Alan V. Oppenheim and Ronald W. Schafer, 3rd edition, 2010, Prentice Hall, Upper Saddle River, NJ. Reference Books : 1. Digital Filters: Analysis, Design, and Applications by Andreas Antoniou, 2nd edition, 1993, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Co. Ltd., New Delhi. | 9 | 3 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 6 - 0 |

29 | EE4140 | Digital Communication Systems Course No : EE4140Course Title : Digital Communication SystemsPre Requisite : EE3005, EE3110Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 6Total Hours PerWeek : 10Description : To introduce the student to the analysis and design of physical-layer signaling in modern digital communication systems. Course Content : 1) Introduction by examples -Digital communication systems: performance metrics and specifications -Physical layer: communications media and their characteristics 2) Background: Deterministic and Random Signals -Passband signals, carrier frequency -Complex baseband and up/down conversion -Filters, channels, signals and bandwidth -Probability, random signals and Additive White Gaussian Noise (AWGN) -Sampling and reconstruction from samples, folded spectrum -Signal power: peak vs average 3) Ideal AWGN channel: Transmitters and Receivers -Pulse Amplitude Modulation (PAM) and Quadrature Amplitude Modulation (QAM) -Transmit pulse, symbol rate and spectrum of PAM/QAM -Optimal receiver: sampled matched-filter front end -Equivalent discrete-time AWGN channel model -Performance: error-rate versus signal-to-noise ratio, decision regions -Coding and capacity -Other imperfections: carrier recovery, symbol-timing recovery, phase distortion, backoff 4) AWGN channel with Inter-Symbol Interference (ISI) -Discrete-time AWGN channel model with ISI -Equalization: linear and decision-feedback -Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) 5) Case study: go through the physical layer portion of a communication standard Text Books : 1) U. Madhow, "Fundamentals of Digital Communication," Cambridge University Press, 2008. Reference Books : 1) J. G. Proakis and M. Salehi, "Digital Communications," Fifth Edition, McGraw-Hill, 2008. 2) John R. Barry, Edward A. Lee, David G. Messerschmitt, "Digital Communication," Third Edition, Springer, 2004. 3) Amos Lapidoth, "A Foundation in Digital Communications," Cambridge University Press, 2009. | 10 | 3 - 1 - 0 - 0 - 6 - 10 |

30 | EE4348 | Quantum Electronics and Lasers Course No : EE4348Course Title : Quantum Electronics and LasersPre Requisite : Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 6Total Hours PerWeek : 9Description : Introduce the concepts of second quantization and the particle nature of light, leading to the concepts of lasers, their linewidth and the basics of laser cavity design. Explore the amplification and modulation of light, leading to nonlinear phenomena such as harmonic generation and parametric amplification Course Content : Time independent and time dependent Schrodinger equation, matrix formulation of quantum mechanics, electromagnetic field quantization. Interaction of radiation and atomic systems, Einstein's equations and laser oscillations. Electro-optic, acousto-optic and magneto-optic devices. The nonlinear optical susceptibility and its application in second harmonic generation and parametric amplification Text Books : Quantum Electronics, A. Yariv Reference Books : Quantum Optics, M.Orszag Nonlinear Optics, R. Boyd | 9 | 3 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 6 - 9 |

31 | EE4371 | Introduction to Data Structures and Algorithms Course No : EE4371Course Title : Introduction to Data Structures and AlgorithmsPre Requisite : programming courseExtended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 6Total Hours PerWeek : 0Description : This is an introductory course on data structures and algorithms meant for students of electrical engineering, especially those interested in computer aided design and design automation. The course covers basic algorithmic complexity theory; data structures and algorithms for list-like structures, graphs, matrices; Algorithm Design Paradigms - greedy, divide and conquer, dynamic programming, backtracking. Course Content : * Data representation and abstract data types; basic concepts of data structures * Efficiency of algorithms; big-Oh notation; time and space complexity; performance measures * Abstract data types: array, lists, trees and associated algorithms * Hashing and searching, dictionary data types * Graph data structures and algorithms: shortest paths, depth-first and breadth-first search, set and vertex cover; applications to design automation * Sparse matrices; representation; efficient numerical algorithms * Algorithm Design Paradigms - greedy, divide and conquer, dynamic programming, backtracking. * Basics of concurrent algorithms; introduction to parallel programming and architectures Text Books : Aho, Hopcroft and Ullmann, "Data structures and Algorithm", Addison Welsey, 1984 Reference Books : T. Cormen, C. Leiserson, R. Rivest and C. Stein, Introduction to Algorithms, 3rd Ed., MIT Press, 2009. E. Horowitz, S. Sahni and S. Rajsekaran, Fundamentals of Computer Algorithms, Galgotia Publications, 2012 | 9 | 3 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 6 - 0 |

32 | EE4502 | Optics for Engineers Course No : EE4502Course Title : Optics for EngineersPre Requisite : C grade in EE2025 Engineering Electromagnetics or equivalentExtended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 7Total Hours PerWeek : 12Description : Optics is used in many applications today. In fact, the field of optics has quietly gone from the research table to being used in numerous applications ranging from devices to metrology. Opto-electronics and metrology are already well-developed fields merging the areas of optics and electronics in many advanced and commonly used devices. For an electrical engineering student to be able to understand and design optics or electronics for such applications, it is important to understand some basic optics. This course will introduce these concepts at a level relevant for an engineer. The course will also study specific engineering examples with a detailed look at the optics and electronics of these systems. Course Content : 1. Basic Optics Geometric Optics Gaussian Optics 2. Advanced topics in optical engineering Diffractive Optics and holography Interferometry Adaptive Optics 3. Opto-electronic applications with details of working. Barcode readers Finger print sensors Pick-up heads used in DVD/CD players Biomedical instrumentation Interferometers for metrology Sensors Holographic data storage 4. Lab Content Optical System Design using OSLO® Simulation lab/Experiments with interferometry, diffractive optics, etc Text Books : 1. Optics by Ghatak 2. Modern Optical Engineering by Smith 3. Optics for Engineers by DiMarzio Reference Books : 1. Introduction to Fourier Optics by J.W.Goodman, McGraw-Hill, 1996 2. Fundamentals of Photonics by Saleh and Teich, John Wiley and Sons Inc., 1991 3. Optical Components, systems and measurement Techniques by Sirohi and Kothiyal, Marcel Dekker Inc., 1991 | 12 | 2 - 0 - 3 - 0 - 7 - 12 |

33 | EE4708 | Data Analytics Laboratory Course No : EE4708Course Title : Data Analytics LaboratoryPre Requisite : CH5019Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 3Total Hours PerWeek : 0Description : This course will introduce the students to practical aspects of data analytics. The course will start with a basic introduction to various python toolkits followed by using these toolkits for developing various supervised and unsupervised machine learning algorithms. Course Content : 1.Introduction to various Python toolkits: Numpy for handling arrays and matrices; SciPy for scientific computing; Matplotlib for data visualization; Pandas for data manipulation; SciKit Learn library for machine learning. 2.Linear models for regression: Ordinary least squares; Ridge regression (l2 regularization); Lasso (l1 regularization); Elastic Net (l2-l1 regularization). 3.Linear classification: Linear Discriminant Analysis (LDA); Logistics regression; Linear Support Vector Machine (SVM); l2 and l1 regularized versions of these algorithms. 4.Non-linear algorithms: Kernel SVM, Random forrest. Neural network. 5.Unsupervised learning: Dimensionality reduction technique such as Principal Component Analysis (PCA), Clustering techniques such as k-Means clustering and Agglomerative clustering. Text Books : 1.Sarah Guido, Andreas C. Müller, Introduction to Machine Learning with Python, O'Reilly Media, Inc., 2016. 2.Jerome H. Friedman, Robert Tibshirani, and Trevor Hastie, The Elements of Statistical Learning, Second Edition (Springer Series in Statistics) Reference Books : 1.Edouard Duchesnay, Tommy Löfstedt, Statistics and Machine Learning in Python, Draft by the authors, available online. | 6 | 0 - 0 - 3 - 0 - 3 - 0 |

34 | EE4801 | Honours Self-Study Elective I Course No : EE4801Course Title : Honours Self-Study Elective IPre Requisite : Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 6Total Hours PerWeek : 9Description : To give students an exposure to qualitative and quantitative properties of real world networks, mathematical models of networks, and algorithms for analysis. Course Content : Theory: Networks and their representation, Graph theoretic concepts, Measures and metrics such as centrality, reciprocity, similarity, homophily, and assortativity. Small world effects, degree distributions, scale-free graphs, clustering. Algorithms: for degree distribution, shortest path, max-flow, min-cut, clustering, partitioning, and community detection. Models: Random graphs, Erdos-Renyi model and properties, Preferential attachment, Barabasi-Albert model, Vertex copying models, Small-world models. Percolation and spread of epidemics on networks (if time permits) Text Books : 1. “NETWORKS: An introduction" by M.E.J. Newman, OUP, 2010. Reference Books : 1. Social and Economic Networks by M.O. Jackson, Princeton University Press, 2010. 2. Networks, Crowds, and Markets: Reasoning About a Highly Connected World by David Easley and Jon Kleinberg Cambridge University Press, 2010 | 9 | 3 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 6 - 9 |

35 | EE4900 | B.Tech Project Course No : EE4900Course Title : B.Tech ProjectPre Requisite : Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 27Total Hours PerWeek : 27Description : This course can be taken by B.Tech students, and by Dual Degree students towards B.Tech credit requirement. Course Content : Project Work Text Books : Not Applicable Reference Books : Not Applicable | 27 | 0 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 27 - 27 |

36 | EE5002 | Analysis of Networks & Systems Course No : EE5002Course Title : Analysis of Networks & SystemsPre Requisite : UG courses on Electrical Circuits and Networks and systems Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 8Total Hours PerWeek : 12Description : PG level second course on Networks and systems. Course Content : Introduction, Network theorems, Fourier and Laplace transforms, positve real functions, passive network synthesis, passive and active filter basics, S-parameters and transmission lines, adjoint networks and sensitivity analysis, numerical analysis of nonlinear circuits and transients, discrete-time systems and z-transforms, digital filter basics, graph theory and state-variable analysis. Text Books : - Reference Books : 1) Introduction to circuit synthesis and design Gabor C. Temes and Jack W. LaPatra, McGraw-Hill. 2) Electrical network theory Norman Balabanian, Theodore A. Bickart Wiley, 1969 3) Computer-aided Network Design D. A. Calahan McGraw Hill, 1968 4) Network Analysis M. Van Valkenburg Pearson Education, 2006 5) Introduction to Modern Network Synthesis M. Van Valkenburg John Wiley & Sons. | 12 | 4 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 8 - 12 |

37 | EE5003 | Electrical Networks and Systems Course No : EE5003Course Title : Electrical Networks and SystemsPre Requisite : Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 6Total Hours PerWeek : 10Description : This course will introduce students to circuits-oriented aspects of electrical systems, with an introduction to networks, feedback, noise, and effects of nonlinearity and time variance. The target audience will consist of first-semester graduate students. At the end of this course, the student will be able to understand and analyze the effects of feedback, noise, nonlinearity and time variance on circuits and systems. Course Content : 1) Circuits and Networks: Review of nodal analysis/modified nodal analysis and basic circuit theorems. Nodal analysis with controlled sources and magnetically coupled systems. Resonant circuits. 2) 2-port networks, small signal analysis: Linear two port networks and network theorems. Small signal analysis of networks. 3) Transmission lines: 2-port networks at high frequencies, s-parameters. Lumped vs distributed representations. Lossless vs lossy transmission lines. Special cases - quarter wavelength; short, open and matched loads. 4) Ideal opamps, feedback (system level): Basics of operational amplifier. Op-amp based building blocks. Feedback theory, negative/positive feedback. Stability criteria, review of bode plot with gain and phase margin. Compensation. 5) Introduction to noise in circuits: Thermal noise in resistors. Noise analysis in networks (including controlled sources). Input referred current and voltage sources. Noise correlation. 6) Nonlinearity, time variance: Representations and effects of nonlinearities and time variance in circuits. Effects on noise. Text Books : None. Reference Books : 1. Behzad Razavi, “Design of Analog CMOS Integrated Circuits,” McGraw Hill Education; Second edition (1 November 2017), ISBN-13: 978-9387067844 2. Charles A. Desoer & Ernest S. Kuh, “Basic Circuit Theory,” McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1969. | 10 | 3 - 1 - 0 - 0 - 6 - 10 |

38 | EE5003W | Electrical Networks and Systems Course No : EE5003WCourse Title : Electrical Networks and SystemsPre Requisite : Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 6Total Hours PerWeek : 10Description : This course will introduce students to circuits-oriented aspects of electrical systems, with an introduction to networks, feedback, noise, and effects of nonlinearity and time variance. The target audience will consist of first-semester graduate students. At the end of this course, the student will be able to understand and analyze the effects of feedback, noise, nonlinearity and time variance on circuits and systems. Course Content : 1) Circuits and Networks:Review of nodal analysis/modified nodal analysis and basic circuit theorems. Nodal analysis with controlled sources and magnetically coupled systems. Resonant circuits.2) 2-port networks, small signal analysis:Linear two port networks and network theorems. Small signal analysis of networks.3) Transmission lines:2-port networks at high frequencies, s-parameters. Lumped vs distributed representations. Lossless vs lossy transmission lines. Special cases - quarter wavelength; short, open and matched loads.4) Ideal opamps, feedback (system level):Basics of operational amplifier. Op-amp based building blocks. Feedback theory, negative/positive feedback. Stability criteria, review of bode plot with gain and phase margin. Compensation.5) Introduction to noise in circuits:Thermal noise in resistors. Noise analysis in networks (including controlled sources). Input referred current and voltage sources. Noise correlation.6) Nonlinearity, time variance:Representations and effects of nonlinearities and time variance in circuits. Effects on noise. Text Books : None. Reference Books : 1. Behzad Razavi, “Design of Analog CMOS Integrated Circuits,” McGraw Hill Education; Second edition (1 November 2017), ISBN-13: 978-93870678442. Charles A. Desoer & Ernest S. Kuh, “Basic Circuit Theory,” McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1969. | 10 | 3 - 1 - 0 - 0 - 6 - 10 |

39 | EE5011 | Computer Methods in Electrical Engineering Course No : EE5011Course Title : Computer Methods in Electrical EngineeringPre Requisite : C programming knowledgeExtended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 7Total Hours PerWeek : 12Description : To teach numerical methods used widely in Electrical Engineering through intensive assignments and lab. The course follows in detail some of the chapters of Numerical Recipes in C. Theoretical material is taken from Reference 3. The purpose of this course is neither to teach programming nor to teach theory. It is to teach enough theory to make students intelligent users of algorithms that are widely available. Course Content : 1. Programming Overview Interfacing C code to Python. Debugging and Profiling. Precision issues. 2. Interpolation Polynomial, rational function and spline interpolation. 2D interpolation 3. Integration Romberg and spline integration. Effect of discontinuities. Improper integrals. Gaussian quadratures. 4. Function Fitting Taylor approximations vs minimax approximations. Chebyshev, Rational Chebyshev and fourier fitting. Fast algorithms. Effect of poles. 5. Root Finding Root finding in 1-D and N-D 6. Minimization 1-D minimization. Simplex, Powell and Conjugate Gradient methods in higher dimensions 6. Random variables Generating random numbers, testing. Generating desired pdfs. Introduction to Monte Carlo methods. The chi-squared and K.S. tests to determine if distributions differ. 7. Optional: Simulated Annealing Finding global minimum in a problem with many local minima 8. Linear Algebra Brief overview of theory following Strang. Numerical techniques using eigen decomposition and SVD. Sparse matrices 10. Optional Alternate Topics: ODEs, PDEs, Digital filters and Model based estimation Text Books : 1. WH Press, SA Teukolsky, WT Vetterling and BP FLannery, Numerical Recipes in C, 2. J. Stoer and R. Bulirsch, Introduction to Numerical Analysis, Springer, New York 2002. Reference Books : 1. Gilbert Strang, Introduction to Linear Algebra and its Applications., Thomson 2006. | 12 | 2 - 0 - 3 - 0 - 7 - 12 |

40 | EE5112 | Detection Theory Course No : EE5112Course Title : Detection TheoryPre Requisite : ProbabilityExtended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 8Total Hours PerWeek : 12Description : To teach the fundamentals of hypothesis testing and signal detection; To introduce topics of current research interest in detection theory Course Content : 1) Hypothesis Testing: Bayesian hypothesis testing, Minimax hypothesis testing, Neyman-Pearson hypothesis testing, Composite hypothesis testing 2) Signal Detection: Deterministic signals in independent noise, Deterministic signals in (non-i.i.d.) Gaussian noise, Detection of signals with random parameters, Performance 3) Sequential detection: Sequential Probability Ratio Test 4) Change Detection Text Books : H. V. Poor, "An Introduction to Signal Detection and Estimation," Springer, Second Edition, 1998. Reference Books : [1] S. M. Kay, "Fundamentals of Statistical Signal Processing: Detection Theory," Prentice Hall, 1998. [2] H. L. Van Trees, "Detection, Estimation, and Modulation Theory, Part I," John Wiley, 1968. | 12 | 4 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 8 - 12 |

41 | EE5112W | Detection Theory Course No : EE5112WCourse Title : Detection TheoryPre Requisite : ProbabilityExtended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 8Total Hours PerWeek : 12Description : To teach the fundamentals of hypothesis testing and signal detection; To introduce topics of current research interest in detection theory Course Content : 1) Hypothesis Testing: Bayesian hypothesis testing, Minimax hypothesis testing, Neyman-Pearson hypothesis testing, Composite hypothesis testing2) Signal Detection: Deterministic signals in independent noise, Deterministic signals in (non-i.i.d.) Gaussian noise, Detection of signals with random parameters, Performance3) Sequential detection: Sequential Probability Ratio Test4) Change Detection Text Books : H. V. Poor, "An Introduction to Signal Detection and Estimation," Springer, Second Edition, 1998. Reference Books : [1] S. M. Kay, "Fundamentals of Statistical Signal Processing: Detection Theory," Prentice Hall, 1998.[2] H. L. Van Trees, "Detection, Estimation, and Modulation Theory, Part I," John Wiley, 1968. | 12 | 4 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 8 - 12 |

42 | EE5120 | Applied Linear Algebra I for EE Course No : EE5120Course Title : Applied Linear Algebra I for EEPre Requisite : Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 8Total Hours PerWeek : 12Description : Introduce the fundamentals of vector spaces, inner products, linear transformations, and eigenspaces to electrical engineering students. Course Content : Linear System of Equations: Gaussian elimination—ehelon forms—existence, uniqueness, and multiplicity of solutions in a system of linear equations. Vector Spaces: Definition—linear dependence and independence—spanning sets, basis, and dimension—definition of subspace—intersection and sum of subspaces—direct sums and embedding of subspaces. Linear Transformations: Definition—matrix representation of a linear transformation—the four fundamental subspaces associated with a linear transformation—system of linear equations revisited—change of bases—similarity transformations—invertible transformations. Inner Products: Definition, induced norm, inequalities, orthogonality—Gram-Schmidt orthogonalization process—orthogonal and rank one projections—unitary transformations and isometry. Eigen Decomposition: Eigenvalues and eigenvectors—Gerschgorin circles—characteristic polynomials and eigenspaces—diagonlizability conditions—invariant subspaces—spectral theorem—Rayleigh quotient. Text Books : 1. Linear Algebra and Its Applications, G. Strang, Cengage Learning,4th edition, 2005. 2. Mtarix Analysis and Applied Linear Algebra,C.D. Meyer, SIAM, 2000. Reference Books : 1. Linear Algebra and its Applications, D.C. Lay, Pearson Education, 4th edition, 2011. 2. Linear Algebra, S.H. Friedberg, A.J. Insel, and L.E. Spence, Pearson Education, 4th edition, 2002. | 12 | 4 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 8 - 12 |

43 | EE5120W | Applied Linear Algebra I for EE Course No : EE5120WCourse Title : Applied Linear Algebra I for EEPre Requisite : Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 8Total Hours PerWeek : 12Description : Introduce the fundamentals of vector spaces, inner products, linear transformations, and eigenspaces to electrical engineering students. Course Content : Linear System of Equations: Gaussian elimination—ehelon forms—existence, uniqueness, and multiplicity of solutions in a system of linear equations.Vector Spaces: Definition—linear dependence and independence—spanning sets, basis, and dimension—definition of subspace—intersection and sum of subspaces—direct sums and embedding of subspaces.Linear Transformations: Definition—matrix representation of a linear transformation—the four fundamental subspaces associated with a linear transformation—system of linear equations revisited—change of bases—similarity transformations—invertible transformations.Inner Products: Definition, induced norm, inequalities, orthogonality—Gram-Schmidt orthogonalization process—orthogonal and rank one projections—unitary transformations and isometry.Eigen Decomposition: Eigenvalues and eigenvectors—Gerschgorin circles—characteristic polynomials and eigenspaces—diagonlizability conditions—invariant subspaces—spectral theorem—Rayleigh quotient. Text Books : 1. Linear Algebra and Its Applications, G. Strang, Cengage Learning,4th edition, 2005.2. Mtarix Analysis and Applied Linear Algebra,C.D. Meyer, SIAM, 2000. Reference Books : 1. Linear Algebra and its Applications, D.C. Lay, Pearson Education, 4th edition, 2011.2. Linear Algebra, S.H. Friedberg, A.J. Insel, and L.E. Spence, Pearson Education, 4th edition, 2002. | 12 | 4 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 8 - 12 |

44 | EE5121 | Convex Optimization Course No : EE5121Course Title : Convex OptimizationPre Requisite : Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 8Total Hours PerWeek : 12Description : To recognize and formulate convex optimization problems in various applications. Course Content : Mathematical preliminaries: real analysis - ordered sets, metric spaces, norm, inner product, open, closed and compact sets, continuous and differentiable functions Convex sets: Standard examples of convex sets, operations preserving convexity, separating and supporting hyperplane, generalized inequalities Convex functions: First and second order conditions for convexity, examples, operations preserving convexity, quasiconvex functions, logconcave functions Convex optimization problems: Standard form, equivalent formulation, optimality criteria, quasi convex optimization, linear programming, quadratic programming, cone programming, SDPs, LMIs, geometric programming, Multi-objective optimization Duality: Lagrangian duality, weak and strong duality, slater's condition, optimality condition, complementary slackness, KKT conditions Some basic algorithms Text Books : 1. Convex Optimization' by Stephen Boyd and Lieven Vandenberghe, Cambridge University Press 2004. 2. Convex Optimization Theory by Dimitri P. Bertsekas, Athena Scientific Belmont, 2009 3. Lecture notes on OPTIMIZATION CONVEX ANALYSIS NONLINEAR PROGRAMMING THEORY and NONLINEAR PROGRAMMING ALGORITHMS: Ben Tal and Nemirovski Reference Books : 1. Linear and Nonlinear Programming' by David G. Luenberger, Springer 2003. 2. Applied Optimization: Formulation and Algorithms for Engineering Systems' by Ross Baldick, Cambridge University Press 2006. 3. A First Course in Optimization Theory' by Rangarajan K. Sundaram, Cambridge University Press 1996. 4. Optimization by Vector Space Methods' by David G. Luenberger, Wiley Professional 1969. | 12 | 3 - 1 - 0 - 0 - 8 - 12 |

45 | EE5130 | Digital Signal Processing Course No : EE5130Course Title : Digital Signal ProcessingPre Requisite : Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 8Total Hours PerWeek : 12Description : This course is intended only for incoming PG students who have already had an exposure to DSP. Its objectives are (a) to reinforce the fundamentals of DSP, (b) to cover in some depth a topic such as the transform-domain analysis of LTI systems, (c) to introduce an advanced topic such as multirate DSP. Course Content : (1) Review of Discrete-Time Signals and Systems, LTI systems, convolution, sampling; (2) Review of Discrete-Time Fourier Transform, Z-Transform, DFT (FFT) and their properties; (3) LTI systems in the transform domain: poles and zeros, magnitude and phase response, group delay; (4) Linear-phase, allpass and minimum-phase systems, spectral factorization; (5) Introduction to multirate DSP Text Books : 1. Discrete-Time Signal Processing (3rd ed.) by A.V. Oppenheim and R.W. Schafer (Pearson 2010) 2. Digital Signal Processing: A Computer-based Approach (4th ed.) by S.K. Mitra (McGraw-Hill 2011) Reference Books : None | 12 | 4 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 8 - 12 |

46 | EE5130W | Digital Signal Processing Course No : EE5130WCourse Title : Digital Signal ProcessingPre Requisite : Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 8Total Hours PerWeek : 12Description : This course is intended only for incoming PG studentswho have already had an exposure to DSP.Its objectives are(a) to reinforce the fundamentals of DSP,(b) to cover in some depth a topic suchas the transform-domain analysis of LTI systems,(c) to introduce an advanced topic such as multirate DSP. Course Content : (1) Review of Discrete-Time Signals and Systems, LTI systems, convolution,sampling;(2) Review of Discrete-Time Fourier Transform, Z-Transform, DFT (FFT)and their properties;(3) LTI systems in the transform domain: poles and zeros, magnitude and phaseresponse, group delay;(4) Linear-phase, allpass and minimum-phase systems, spectral factorization;(5) Introduction to multirate DSP Text Books : 1. Discrete-Time Signal Processing (3rd ed.) by A.V. Oppenheim and R.W. Schafer (Pearson 2010)2. Digital Signal Processing: A Computer-based Approach (4th ed.) by S.K. Mitra (McGraw-Hill 2011) Reference Books : None | 12 | 4 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 8 - 12 |

47 | EE5131 | Selected Topics in Digital Signal Processing Course No : EE5131Course Title : Selected Topics in Digital Signal ProcessingPre Requisite : EE5130 Digital Signal Processing, COTExtended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 6Total Hours PerWeek : 0Description : To teach the basics of filter structures, multirate signal processing, spectral analysis, and cepstral analysis Course Content : Structures for Discrete-Time Systems: IIR filter structures (direct form, cascade form, parallel form)—FIR filter structures (direct form for linear phase systems, frequency sampling structure)—signal flow graphs—lattice structures for FIR and all-pole IIR systems—state-space representation—introduction to coefficient quantization. Introduction to Fourier Analysis of Signals: Fourier analysis of continuous-time signals using the DFT—stationary and non-stationary signals—spectrogram analysis of non-stationary signals—effect of windowing on the spectrum—properties of the Dirichlet kernel—commonly used data winodws (Bartlett, Hann, Hamming, Blackman, Kaiser, Dolph)—frequency measurement of a single complex sinusoid—two complex exponentials case—chirp Fourier transform—discrete cosine transform (DCT). Cepstrum Analysis and Homomorphic Deconvolution: Definition of the cepstrum—definition of the complex cepstrum—alternative expressions for the complex cepstrum—complex cepstrum of exponential and minimum-phase sequences—relationship between the real cepstrum and the complex cepstrum—computation of the complex cepstrum—phase unwrapping—computation of the complex cepstrum using the logarithmic derivative—minimum-phase realizations for minimum-phase sequences—recursive computation of the complex cepstrum for minimum-phase sequences—computation of the complex cepstrum using polynomial roots—deconvolution using the complex cepstrum—minimum-phase/allpass homomorphic deconvolution—minimum-phase/maximum-phase homomorphic deconvolution—the complex cepstrum of a simple multipath model (computation of the complex cepstrum by z-transform analysis and using the DFT)—homomorphic deconvolution for the multipath model—applications to speech processing. Hilbert Transform: Continuous-time bandpass signal representation—pre-envelope and analytic signal—continuous-time Hilbert transform—complex envelope—in-phase (I) and quadrature signal (Q) representation—block-diagram for generating I and Q components (real-signal and complex-signal versions)—Bedrosian product theorem—Hilbert transform for causal discrete-time sequences—relationship between real and imaginary parts of a sequence whose spectrum is "periodically causal"—relationship between the real and imaginary parts of the spectrum corresponding to a "periodically causal" sequence—discrete-time Hilbert transformer design using Type III and Type IV filters (window-based design method). Text Books : 1. Applied Digital Signal Processing, D.G. Manolakis and V.K. Ingle, Cambridge University Press, 2011. 2. Discrete-time Signal Processing, A.V. Oppenheim and R.W. Schafer, 3rd edition, Prentice-Hall, 2010. Reference Books : Digital Signal Processing, S.K. Mitra, McGraw-Hill, 4th edition, 2010 | 9 | 3 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 6 - 0 |

48 | EE5140 | Digital Modulation and Coding Course No : EE5140Course Title : Digital Modulation and CodingPre Requisite : Probability and Random Variables (EE5110 Concurrent)Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 8Total Hours PerWeek : 12Description : Teach the fundamentals of digital communications, focussing on digital modulation and the optimal demodulation techniques Course Content : Complex Baseband Representation: Energy and Power signals, Frequency domain representations, Passband and Baseband signals, Upconversion and Downconversion, Equivalences between baseband and passband signals Digital Modulation: Linear modulation, pulse shaping, PSD of linear modulated signals, Nyquist criterion for ISI avoidance, Differential Modulation, Nonlinear Modulation, M-ary constellations and power efficiency Coherent Demodulation: Signal space concepts, Additive White Gaussian Noise, Bayesian Hypothesis Testing, Optimal demodulation in AWGN, Error Performance, Elementary link budget analysis Noncoherent Demodulation: Synchronization errors, Timing and Frequency errors, Noncoherent demodulation, Square-law detector, Error performance ISI Channels: Demodulation of stream of symbols, Inter-symbol Interference, Optimal demodulation with ISI, Viterbi algorithm, Linear equalization, Decision feedback equalization Text Books : U. Madhow, "Fundamentals of Digital Communication," Cambridge University Press, 2008. Reference Books : J. G. Proakis and M. Salehi, "Digital Communications," Fifth Edition, McGraw-Hill, 2008. | 12 | 4 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 8 - 12 |

49 | EE5140W | Digital Modulation and Coding Course No : EE5140WCourse Title : Digital Modulation and CodingPre Requisite : Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 8Total Hours PerWeek : 12Description : Teach the fundamentals of digital communications, focussing on digital modulation and the optimal demodulation techniques Course Content : Complex Baseband Representation: Energy and Power signals, Frequency domain representations, Passband and Baseband signals, Upconversion and Downconversion, Equivalences between baseband and passband signals Digital Modulation: Linear modulation, pulse shaping, PSD of linear modulated signals, Nyquist criterion for ISI avoidance, Differential Modulation, Nonlinear Modulation, M-ary constellations and power efficiencyCoherent Demodulation: Signal space concepts, Additive White Gaussian Noise, Bayesian Hypothesis Testing, Optimal demodulation in AWGN, Error Performance, Elementary link budget analysisNoncoherent Demodulation: Synchronization errors, Timing and Frequency errors, Noncoherent demodulation, Square-law detector, Error performanceISI Channels: Demodulation of stream of symbols, Inter-symbol Interference, Optimal demodulation with ISI, Viterbi algorithm, Linear equalization, Decision feedback equalization Text Books : U. Madhow, "Fundamentals of Digital Communication," Cambridge University Press, 2008. Reference Books : J. G. Proakis and M. Salehi, "Digital Communications," Fifth Edition, McGraw-Hill, 2008. | 12 | 4 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 8 - 12 |

50 | EE5141 | Introduction to Wireless and Cellular Communication Course No : EE5141Course Title : Introduction to Wireless and Cellular CommunicationPre Requisite : EE5140 / EE4140 / EE3005Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 8Total Hours PerWeek : 12Description : Fundamentals of the wireless channel – analytical methods, modeling, computer simulation, and propagation effects. Its impact on BER performance and system design. Overview of cellular systems 2G/3G/4G/5G – design, and technical aspects. A good foundation in diversity, capacity and MIMO aspects. In depth coverage of CDMA and OFDM systems Course Content : Overview of cellular evolution to 4G and beyond, Introduction to terminology, link budget, Computer Simulation of Digital Communications link Cellular Concepts - Freq re-use, Co-channel interference, handoff, Erlang capacity) Radio Propagation – small scale effects, Multipath, different types of fading, delay-spread, Computer generation of fading channels, BER performance in fading Diversity - Types of diversity, analytical methods, computer simulation Capacity of wireless channels - CSIR, CSIT, Water-filling Introduction to MIMO systems Principles of CDMA cellular systems Principles of OFDM based broadband wireless systems Radio Propagation – large scale effects, Propagation and Path-loss models, shadowing, diffraction loss Text Books : T. S. Rappaport, “Wireless Communications – Principles and Practice” (2nd edition) Pearson, 2010, ISBN 9788131731864 A. Molisch, “Wireless Communications,” Wiley, 2005 Reference Books : . Goldsmith, “Wireless Communications,” Cambridge Univ Press, 2005 Haykin & Moher, “Modern Wireless Communications” Indian Edition, Pearson, 2011, ISBN 9788131704431 D. Tse and P. Viswanath, “Fundamentals of Wireless Communications,” Cambridge Univ Press, 2005 J. G. Proakis, “Digital Communications,” McGraw Hill, New York, 1989 | 12 | 4 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 8 - 12 |

51 | EE5141W | Introduction to Wireless and Cellular Communication Course No : EE5141WCourse Title : Introduction to Wireless and Cellular CommunicationPre Requisite : Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 8Total Hours PerWeek : 12Description : Fundamentals of the wireless channel – analytical methods, modeling, computer simulation, and propagation effects. Its impact on BER performance and system design. Overview of cellular systems 2G/3G/4G/5G – design, and technical aspects. A good foundation in diversity, capacity and MIMO aspects. In depth coverage of CDMA and OFDM systems Course Content : Overview of cellular evolution to 4G and beyond, Introduction to terminology, link budget, Computer Simulation of Digital Communications link Cellular Concepts - Freq re-use, Co-channel interference, handoff, Erlang capacity) Radio Propagation – small scale effects, Multipath, different types of fading, delay-spread, Computer generation of fading channels, BER performance in fading Diversity - Types of diversity, analytical methods, computer simulation Capacity of wireless channels - CSIR, CSIT, Water-filling Introduction to MIMO systemsPrinciples of CDMA cellular systems Principles of OFDM based broadband wireless systemsRadio Propagation – large scale effects, Propagation and Path-loss models, shadowing, diffraction loss Text Books : T. S. Rappaport, “Wireless Communications – Principles and Practice” (2nd edition) Pearson, 2010, ISBN 9788131731864A. Molisch, “Wireless Communications,” Wiley, 2005 Reference Books : . Goldsmith, “Wireless Communications,” Cambridge Univ Press, 2005Haykin & Moher, “Modern Wireless Communications” Indian Edition, Pearson, 2011, ISBN 9788131704431D. Tse and P. Viswanath, “Fundamentals of Wireless Communications,” Cambridge Univ Press, 2005J. G. Proakis, “Digital Communications,” McGraw Hill, New York, 1989 | 12 | 4 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 8 - 12 |

52 | EE5142 | Introduction to Information Theory and Coding Course No : EE5142Course Title : Introduction to Information Theory and CodingPre Requisite : EE4140Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 8Total Hours PerWeek : 0Description : To introduce students to fundamentals of information theory and coding theory. Course Content : 1) Entropy, Relative Entropy, and Mutual Information: Entropy, Joint Entropy and Conditional Entropy, Relative Entropy and Mutual Information, Chain Rules, Data-Processing Inequality, Fano’s Inequality 2) Typical Sequences and Asymptotic Equipartition Property: Asymptotic Equipartition Property Theorem, Consequences of the AEP: Data Compression, High-Probability Sets and the Typical Set 3) Source Coding and Data Compression: Kraft Inequality, Huffman Codes, Optimality of Huffman Codes 4) Channel Capacity: Symmetric Channels, Properties of Channel Capacity, Jointly Typical Sequences, Channel Coding Theorem, Fano’s Inequality and the Converse to the Coding Theorem 5) Differential Entropy and Gaussian Channel: Differential Entropy, AEP for Continuous Random Variables, Properties of Differential Entropy, Relative Entropy, and Mutual Information, Coding Theorem for Gaussian Channels 6) Linear Binary Block Codes: Introduction, Generator and Parity-Check Matrices, Repetition and Single-Parity-Check Codes, Binary Hamming Codes, Error Detection with Linear Block Codes, Weight Distribution and Minimum Hamming Distance of a Linear Block Code, Hard-decision and Soft-decision Decoding of Linear Block Codes, Cyclic Codes, Parameters of BCH and RS Codes, Interleaved and Concatenated Codes 7) Convolutional Codes: Encoder Realizations and Classifications, Minimal Encoders, Trellis representation, MLSD and the Viterbi Algorithm, Bit-wise MAP Decoding and the BCJR Algorithm Text Books : 1) Elements of Information Theory by Thomas Cover, Joy Thomas 2) Channel Codes: Classical and Modern by William Ryan, Shu Lin Reference Books : 1) Information Theory and Reliable Communication by Robert Gallager | 12 | 3 - 1 - 0 - 0 - 8 - 0 |

53 | EE5143 | Information Theory Course No : EE5143Course Title : Information TheoryPre Requisite : Probability (EE3110 or equivalent)Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 6Total Hours PerWeek : 9Description : Provide an introduction to information theory. Course Content : Entropy, relative entropy and mutual information Asymptotic equipartition property Entropy rate of a stochastic process Data compression Channel capacity Differential entropy Gaussian channel Rate distortion theory Network information theory Text Books : Elements of Information Theory, by T. M. Cover and J. A. Thomas, 2nd Edition, John Wiley & Sons. Reference Books : A First Course in Information Theory by Raymond Yeung, Springer, 2002. | 9 | 3 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 6 - 9 |

54 | EE5150 | Communication Networks Course No : EE5150Course Title : Communication NetworksPre Requisite : Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 8Total Hours PerWeek : 12Description : The course seeks to provide an analytical introduction to communication networking. The course will identify important protocols and algorithms that are part of standard communication networks and motivate their design based on simple performance analysis and evaluation. An exercise with network simulator, ns-3, will permit us to evaluate performance of complex network systems as well. Course Content : 1) Introduction to common networks such as the Internet, WiFi, Cellular networks, Ad hoc and Sensor networks; Introduction to ISO/OSI Layers; Deterministic and Stochastic Network Calculus, Introduction to Network Simulators; 2) Medium Access Control Layer: ARQ protocols; Random access; Backoff algorithms; WFQ implementations; Introduction to Queueing theory; Mesh networks; 3) Routing Layer: Routing algorithms for wired, wireless and mobile networks; Multihop networks; Flow management and Rate region; Buffer management; 4) Transport Layer: TCP; UDP 5) Applications: Cross-layer Design; Network Monitoring; Performance Measures; Notions of fairness; QoS; Text Books : 1) Communication Networking: An Analytical Approach, Anurag Kumar, D Manjunath and Joy Kuri, Morgan Kauffmann, 2004. 2) Data Networks, 2nd Edition, Dimitri P Bertsekas and R Gallager, Pearson, 1992. Reference Books : 1) Wireless Networking, Anurag Kumar, D Manjunath and Joy Kuri, Morgan Kauffmann, 2004. 2) Resource Allocation and Cross-Layer Control in Wireless Networks, Leonidas Georgiadis, Michael J. Neely and Leandros Tassiulas, NOW Publishers, 2006. 3) Computer Networks, A Tanenbaum, Pearson Education India, 5th Edition, 2013. 4) Computer Networking: A top-down approach, James F Kurose, Pearson Education, 5th Edition, 2012. 5) Various research publications. | 12 | 4 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 8 - 12 |

55 | EE5150W | Communication Networks Course No : EE5150WCourse Title : Communication NetworksPre Requisite : Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 8Total Hours PerWeek : 12Description : The course seeks to provide an analytical introduction to communication networking. The course will identify important protocols and algorithms that are part of standard communication networks and motivate their design based on simple performance analysis and evaluation. An exercise with network simulator, ns-3, will permit us to evaluate performance of complex network systems as well. Course Content : 1) Introduction to common networks such as the Internet, WiFi, Cellular networks, Ad hoc and Sensor networks; Introduction to ISO/OSI Layers; Deterministic and Stochastic Network Calculus, Introduction to Network Simulators; 2) Medium Access Control Layer: ARQ protocols; Random access; Backoff algorithms; WFQ implementations; Introduction to Queueing theory; Mesh networks;3) Routing Layer: Routing algorithms for wired, wireless and mobile networks; Multihop networks; Flow management and Rate region; Buffer management;4) Transport Layer: TCP; UDP5) Applications: Cross-layer Design; Network Monitoring; Performance Measures; Notions of fairness; QoS; Text Books : 1) Communication Networking: An Analytical Approach, Anurag Kumar, D Manjunath and Joy Kuri, Morgan Kauffmann, 2004.2) Data Networks, 2nd Edition, Dimitri P Bertsekas and R Gallager, Pearson, 1992. Reference Books : 1) Wireless Networking, Anurag Kumar, D Manjunath and Joy Kuri, Morgan Kauffmann, 2004.2) Resource Allocation and Cross-Layer Control in Wireless Networks, Leonidas Georgiadis, Michael J. Neely and Leandros Tassiulas, NOW Publishers, 2006.3) Computer Networks, A Tanenbaum, Pearson Education India, 5th Edition, 2013.4) Computer Networking: A top-down approach, James F Kurose, Pearson Education, 5th Edition, 2012.5) Various research publications. | 12 | 4 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 8 - 12 |

56 | EE5151 | Communication Techniques Course No : EE5151Course Title : Communication TechniquesPre Requisite : Digital Communications (to be done concurrently is also OK)Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 8Total Hours PerWeek : 12Description : Motivation: This course is to expose students to several design problems in communication systems where the solution can be obtained by a combination of intuitive reasoning and fairly simple numerical techniques. We take examples from the classical public switched telephone network, modern wireless cellular communications, and data networks, to bring out the elegance of several engineering solutions which have been developed and commercially deployed over the last 60 years of telecommunications. Course Content : Part-1: From “Digital Telephony”, J.C.Bellamy, 3rd Ed (John Wiley) 1.1 Chapter 1 – Introduction: reading 1.2 Chapter 2 – Why digital representation and trasmission? reading 1.3 Signal representation, Sampling of band-pass signals (Notes) 1.4 Chapter 4 – Digital transmission & multiplexing of digital streams – examples from elastic buffers, bit-stuffing, and marker detection for framing 1.5 Chapter 5 – Digital switching for Voice -- Multistage switches, Non-blocking and Blocking switches, Blocking Probability versus Complexity, (5.1--5.4; excluding 5.2.3 to 5.2.6), Digital Trunking for Voice – interpretation from Erlang-B formula (Notes) Part-2: From “Wireless Communications”, T.S.Rappaport, (Pearson Ed.) 2.1 Chapter 1 – Introduction to wireless communications: reading 2.2 RF Principles, Path Loss, Receiver Sensitivity, Wireless Communication Link Budget, Analog repeater (relay) design, BER of Analog Repeater and Regenerative Repeater (Notes) 2.3 Chapter 2 – Cellular concept – System design fundamentals (emphasis on co-channel interference and system capacity, and trunking efficiency), user capacity of cellular TDMA and DS-CDMA systems (also from Chapter 8) Part-3: From “Data Networks”, Bertsekas and Gallager, 2nd Ed, (Prentice Hall India) 3.1 Elements of Packet Switching – Motivation, ARQ Protocols, Pipelining, Flow Control 3.2 What is hybrid ARQ (HARQ) in 4G LTE systems? Text Books : Please see contents Reference Books : None | 12 | 4 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 8 - 12 |

57 | EE5153 | Foundations of Optical Networking Course No : EE5153Course Title : Foundations of Optical NetworkingPre Requisite : Basic probability theory at UG levelExtended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 8Total Hours PerWeek : 12Description : Foundations of Optical Networking is intended as a first graduate level course for students specializing in Optical Networks. This course also would serve students specializing in “Photonics, Optical Communications and RF” (MTech EE5 stream) who intend to appreciate the communication application of photonics as well as Communication (MTech EE1 stream) students. The course is structured with necessary review material such that it is self-contained. Course Content : Review of Computer Network Basics: Computer Network - definition and scope, protocols, layers & protocol stack, a simple network architecture, ISO/OSI 7 layer reference model, functionalities of first three layers, with emphasis on Data Link layer. Framing, error control, MAC layer functions, CSMA/CD, circuit, packet and message switching (3 weeks) Digital Transmission Basics: A simple synchronous TDM, timing inaccuracies, timing issues in practical digital links, master-slave and independent timing architectures, slips, elastic stores and asynchronous multiplexing (2 weeks) First Generation Optical Networks: Asynchronous multiplexing, SDH networks: G.707 multiplexing structure, layers in SDH, role of pointers in STM frames (2 weeks) Second Generation Optical Networks: Broadcast and Select networks, concept of optical LANs, bus, star topologies, MAC in optical layers, WDM networks, wavelength continuity constraint, concepts of optical pass-through, light-path, logical topology and fiber/physical topology (3 weeks) Network Survivability: Availability, dedicated / shared protection, line, path and ring switching, protection & restoration in SDH networks: UPSR, BLSR/s and BLSR/4 rings. Protection in WDM networks (2 weeks) Trends in Optical Networking Design: Routing algorithms, wavelength assignment, and grooming. (1 week) Text Books : Rajiv Ramaswamy, Kumar N. Sivarajan and Galen Sasaki, “Optical Networks - A Practical Perspective”, Morgan and Kaufmann, NY. 3 e, 2008. Reference Books : 1. Bernstein, G., Rajagopalan, B. and Saha, D., 2003. Optical network control: architecture, protocols, and standards. Addison-Wesley Longman Publishing Co., Inc.. 2. Kachris, C., Bergman, K. and Tomkos, I. eds., 2012. Optical interconnects for future data center networks. Springer Science & Business Media. 3. Sivalingam, K.M. and Subramaniam, S. eds., 2000. Optical WDM networks: Principles and practice (Vol. 554). Springer Science & Business Media. 4. Dutta, R., Kamal, A.E. and Rouskas, G.N. eds., 2008. Traffic grooming for optical networks: foundations, techniques and frontiers. Springer Science & Business Media. 5. 1. Simmons, J.M., 2014. Optical network design and planning. Springer. | 12 | 4 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 8 - 12 |

58 | EE5154 | Complex Network Analysis Course No : EE5154Course Title : Complex Network AnalysisPre Requisite : NILExtended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 8Total Hours PerWeek : 0Description : To serve as a systematic introduction to the field of network analysis. Course Content : 1. Introduction: motivation, examples of networks, review of basic graph theory2. Mathematics of networks: network representations, measures and metrics (centrality measures, homophily,)3. Network algorithms: community and cluster detection, graph partitioning, spectral methods4. Network models: random graph models (Poisson networks, small world networks,), growing random networks (preferential attachment, assortativity,)5. Diffusion through networks: spread of information and epidemics (percolation, models of diffusion), searching and learning in networks Text Books : 1.M. E. J. Newman. Networks: An Introduction. Oxford University Press, 2010.2.M. O. Jackson. Social and Economic Networks. Princeton University Press. 2008. Reference Books : 1.Stanley Wasserman and Katherine Faust. Social Network Analysis: Methods and Applications. Cambridge University Press, 1994. 2.David Easley and Jon Kleinberg. Networks, Crowds, and Markets: Reasoning About a Highly Connected World. Cambridge University Press, 2010.3.Duncan Watts. Six Degrees: The Science of a Connected Age. Norton, 2004.4.Various research papers. | 12 | 4 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 8 - 0 |

59 | EE5155 | Wireless Networks Course No : EE5155Course Title : Wireless NetworksPre Requisite : Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 8Total Hours PerWeek : 12Description : To understand the fundamentals of wireless networking Course Content : Wireless Networking communication protocols, algorithms for network resource allocation, traffic engineering, modeling and performance analysis, Queuing models.wireless local area networks, ad hoc and mesh wireless networks, Routing protocol, TCP,Cross-layer design and optimization, wireless Multiple access techniques,multi packet reception, Next generation WiFi.Standards ( 802.11 family ).Relay networks,inter-vehicular networks, Dynamic spectrum access and cognitive radio networks, Wireless sensor networks, Wireless-specific security, privacy, and authentication, mobile computing.Heterogeneous networks, Mobile data offloading, storage area networks, peer-to-peer networking, issues related to social networks, location aware networking, network management, software defined networks. Machine to machine communication, Frame slotted aloha, RFID, Internet of Things.LTE massive machine type communication. Text Books : Wireless Communications and Networks", William Stallings, Prentice Hall, second edition, 2005Wireless Communications & Networking", Vijay Garg, Morgan Kaufmann, June 2007 Reference Books : Wireless Networking Complete, David Clarke, Morgan KaufmanAnurag Kumar, D. Manjunath, Joy Kuri, ``Wireless Networking," Morgan Kaufman Series in Networking, (an imprint of Elsevier Science), published April 2008. | 12 | 4 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 8 - 12 |

60 | EE5156 | Internet of Things and Management of discrete entities Course No : EE5156Course Title : Internet of Things and Management of discrete entitiesPre Requisite : NoneExtended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 0Total Hours PerWeek : 0Description : As Internet reaches everywhere, it becomes increasingly possible and cost-effective to manage “things,” which were hitherto unmanageable. The course will look at management of power, energy, electric vehicles, water, agriculture and smart infrastructure and cities. It will focus on applications and case studies. Special emphasis will be on Energy and Electric Vehicles. Course Content : 1. Communications: wireless local-area networks, wireless wide-area networks and back-haul networks 2. Sensing and Actuation, remote-processing 3. Powering devices 4. Cloud storage and processing; Data Analytics and Intelligent Management 5. Applications in Grid-Management; Renewable Sources on grid, Storage on grid, demand Management; Management of Power and Energy 6. Applications in Electric Vehicle; Optimising Battery usage 7. Applications in water-distribution management 8. Applications in Agriculture 9. Smart Infrastructure and smart cities Text Books : Internet of Things: A Hands-On Approach, by Vijay Madisetti, Arshdeep Bahga; Orient Blackswan Private Limited - New Delhi; First edition (2015) Reference Books : Everyware: The Dawning Age of Ubiquitous Computing, By Adam Greenfield, Published by New Riders Publishing, 2006 Smart Things: Ubiquitous Computing User Experience Design, by Mike Kuniavsky, Published by Morgan Kaufmann in 2010 | 6 | 2 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 0 |

61 | EE5160 | Error Control Coding Course No : EE5160Course Title : Error Control CodingPre Requisite : Basic linear algebra and probabilityExtended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 6Total Hours PerWeek : 9Description : The course aims to give a detailed introduction to classical theory of block codes and convolutional codes with an emphasis on algebraic codes. It also introduces students to modern codes such as LDPC codes and turbo codes. A basic knowledge of linear algebra and probability is assumed. Course Content : 1. Mathematical Preliminaries Groups, rings, fields, vector spaces, linear algebra review Finite fields: construction, structure of fields, polynomials over finite fields, minimal polynomials, factorization of polynomials 2. Linear block codes Generator and parity check matrices, dual code, distance of a code. Decoding linear codes: MAP decoder, ML decoder, standard array and syndrome decoding, bounded distance decoder. Bounds on codes: Singleton, Hamming, Plotkin, Gilbert-Varshamov bounds and asymptotic bounds Weight enumerators, MacWilliams relation for binary block codes Code constructions: puncturing, extending, shortening, direct sum, product construction, interleaving, concatenation Performance of block codes 3. Important algebraic block codes Cyclic codes, BCH codes, Reed-Solomon codes, Reed-Muller codes and Hamming codes Berlekamp-Massey algorithm for decoding BCH and Reed-Solomon codes 4. Convolutional codes Various formulations of convolutional codes using shift registers, generator sequences, polynomials, and matrices, recursive and non recursive encoders Code parameters: constraint length, memory, free distance Structural properties of convolutional codes: state diagram, trellis diagram, non-catastrophic encoders, weight enumerators Decoding convolutional codes: Viterbi and BCJR algorithms, hard decision and soft decision decoding Performance of convolutional codes 5. Capacity achieving codes LDPC codes: Tanner graphs, Low density parity check (LDPC) codes, iterative decoding, bit flipping and sum product algorithms Introduction to turbo codes Text Books : Error control coding, 2nd ed. Shu Lin and Daniel Costello Jr., Pearson, 2004. Channel codes: Classical and Modern by William E. Ryan and Shu Lin, Cambridge University Press, 2009. Reference Books : Error Correction Coding: Mathematical Methods and Algorithms by Todd K. Moon, Wiley 2006. Iterative Error Correction by Sarah Johnson, Cambridge University Press, 2009. | 9 | 3 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 6 - 9 |

62 | EE5161 | Modern Coding Theory Course No : EE5161Course Title : Modern Coding TheoryPre Requisite : EE5142 or EE5160 or CoTExtended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 6Total Hours PerWeek : 9Description : This course aims to introduce the students to recent developments of coding theory with an emphasis on iterative decoding, turbo codes and LDPC codes. Course Content : 1. Linear Block Codes (Review) Definition and properties, minimum distance, channel models Optimal hard and soft decision decoding in Gaussian channels Bitwise MAP decoders Approximate bitwise MAP decoders 2. Convolutional Codes Definition and properties, trellis structure Recursive and non-recursive encoders, free distance Maximum likelihood decoding in Gaussian channels (Viterbi decoder) BCJR decoding (MAP) and max-log-MAP approximations 3. Low Density Parity Check (LDPC) Codes Definition and construction, degree distributions, regular and irregular ensembles Hard and soft message-passing decoders, peeling decoder, bit flipping and sum product algorithms, and approximations Computation trees, density evolution and threshold for symmetric channels EXIT charts and optimization of degree distribution 4. Turbo Codes Definition and construction Turbo encoder and interleaver, Turbo decoder Ensemble distance properties EXIT charts for turbo codes Turbo code design 5. Advanced topics (A selection will be covered) Repeat accumulate (RA) codes: Definition and construction, regular and irregular RA codes, decoding RA codes Polar Codes: Definition and construction, Encoding and decoding of polar codes, Capacity-approaching property of polar codes Protograph LDPC codes : Definition and construction, decoding and vector density evolution Spatially coupled LDPC codes: Definition and construction, decoding and threshold saturation property Linear programming decoding of block codes Coding for distributed storage Codes in standards and codec implementations Other applications of coding theory Text Books : 1. Channel codes: Classical and Modern by William E. Ryan and Shu Lin, Cambridge University Press, 2009. 2. Iterative Error Correction by Sarah Johnson. Cambridge University Press, 2009. Reference Books : 1. Modern coding theory by Richardson and Urbanke. Cambridge University Press 2008. 2. Error control coding, 2nd ed. Shu Lin and Daniel Costello Jr., Pearson, 2004. 3. Error Correction Coding: Mathematical Methods and Algorithms by Todd K. Moon, Wiley 2006. | 9 | 3 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 6 - 9 |

63 | EE5162 | Topics in Information Theory Course No : EE5162Course Title : Topics in Information TheoryPre Requisite : EE5142Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 6Total Hours PerWeek : 9Description : To introduce the student to advanced topics in information theory. Course Content : This is a second-level course in information theory. The students are assumed to have studied the basic concepts of information theory and capacity of point-to-point channels. The actual topics covered in class will be a selection from the following. Channels with memory/state -MIMO channels -ISI channels, constrained channels -Dirty paper coding -Fading channels Network information theory -Multiple access channels -Broadcast channels -Relay channel -Network coding Information-theoretic secrecy -Wiretap channel -Privacy amplification -Physical layer security Information theory and statistics -Hypothesis testing, universal coding, MDL principle -Minimax theory Zero-error information theory -Shannon capacity of graphs -Information-theoretic methods in combinatorics Text Books : 1. "Elements of Information Theory" by Thomas M. Cover and Joy A. Thomas, Wiley. 2. "Network Information Theory" by Abbas El Gamal and Yeung Han Kim, Cambridge University Press. Reference Books : 1. "Information Theory and Reliable Communication" by Robert A. Gallager, John Wiley & Sons. 2. "Information Theory and Statistics: A Tutorial" by Imre Csiszar and Paul Shields, in Foundations and Trends in Communications and Information Theory, NOW publishers. 3. "Physical-Layer Security: From Information Theory to Security Engineering" by Matthieu R. Bloch and Joao Barros, Cambridge University Press. | 9 | 3 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 6 - 9 |

64 | EE5170 | Speech Signal Processing Course No : EE5170Course Title : Speech Signal ProcessingPre Requisite : EE5130 Digital Signal Processing or equivlaentExtended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 8Total Hours PerWeek : 0Description : To teach the basics of speech signal processing Course Content : (1) The speech signal—process of speech production—acoustic phonetics—the speech chain—anatomy of the ear—sound perception—audttory models. (2) Acoustic theory of speech production—lossless tube models—digital models for sampled speech signals. (3) Time domain processing of speech signals: short-time energy, magnitude, zero-crossing rate, autocorrelation function, AMDF. (4) Frequency domain representations for speech signals: short-time Fourier analysis and its modifications. (5) Cepstrum and homomorphic speech processing: short-time cepsturm and complex cepstrum—cepstrum analysis of all-pole models—cepstrum distance measures. (6) Linear predictive analysis of speech: basics of LP analysis—computation of model gain—frequency domain interpretation—solution of the LP equations—prediction error signal—properties of the LP polynomial—alternative representations of the LP coefficients. (7) Applications: introduction to speech coding, recognition, and synthesis. Text Books : Lawrence Rabiner and Ronald Schafer, “Theory and Applications of Digital Speech Processing,” Prentice-Hall, 2011. Reference Books : 1) T.F. Quatieri, Discrete-Time Speech Signal Processing, Prentice-Hall, 2002. 2) L.R. Rabiner and R. Schafer, Digital Processing of Speech Signals, Prentice-Hall, 1978. 3) J.R. Deller, J.H.L. Hansen, and J.G. Proakis, Discrete-Time Processing of Speech Signals, Wiley India Pvt. Ltd., 2000. 4) Douglas O'Shaughnessy, Speech Communications: Human and Machine, Universities Press, 2001. 5) J. Benetsy, M.M. Sondhi, Y. Huang (eds.), Springer Handbook of Speech Processing, Springer-Verlag, 2008. | 12 | 4 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 8 - 0 |

65 | EE5175 | Image Signal Processing Course No : EE5175Course Title : Image Signal ProcessingPre Requisite : Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 8Total Hours PerWeek : 12Description : Image basics, geometric transformation of images, understanding image formation principles in pin-hole and real aperture cameras, image homography, image registration, image mosaicing, recovering 3D from 2D using different image cues, unitary image transforms and their relationship to 1D transforms, image enhancement techniques, image restoration methods, image superresolution, Course Content : Basics: Applications of image processing. notion of pixel, resolution, quantization, photon noise, Geometric transformations, source-to-target and target-to-source mapping, planar and rotational homography, RANSAC for homography estimation, image registration, change detection, and image mosaicing. Motion blur: Exposure time, weighted frame integration, depth aware warping, spatio-temporal averaging, dynamic scenes. Image Formation in Lens: Pin-hole versus real aperture lens model, lens as a 2D LSI system, blur circle, Doubly block circulant system matrix, pill box and Gaussian blur models, space invariant and space variant blurring. 3D Shape from Focus: Depth of field, focal stack, focus operators, focus measure curve, Gaussian interpolation, 3D recovery, focused image recovery. Image Transforms: Data dependent and independent transforms, 1D Orthogonal trasnforms, Kronecker product, 2D orthogonal transforms from 1D, 2D DFT, 2D DFT for image matching, 2D DCT, Walsh-Haddamard transform, Karhunen-Loeve transform, eigenfilters, PCA for face recognition, singular value decomposition, image denoising using SVD. Photometric stereo: Normal estimation, depth reconstruction, uncalibrated PS, Generalized bas relief ambiguity. Image Enhancement: Thresholding methods (peak-valley, Otsu, Chow-Kaneko), histogram equalization and modification, Noise models, mean, weighted mean, median, weighted median, non-local means filter, BM3D, frequency domain filtering, illumination compensation by homomorphic filtering, segmentation by k-means clustering, higher-order statistics based clustering. Image Restoration: Well-posed and ill-posed problems, Fredholm-integral equation, condition number of matrix, conditional mean, Inverse filter, Wiener filter, ML and MAP restoration, image super-resolution. Edge Detection: Gradient operators, Prewitt, Sobel, Roberts, compass operators, LOG, DOG, Canny edge detectors, non-maxima suppression, hysteresis thresholding. Text Books : Digital Image Processing by Gonzalez and Woods. Reference Books : The essential guide to image processing by Alan Bovik. | 12 | 4 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 8 - 12 |

66 | EE5175W | Image Signal Processing Course No : EE5175WCourse Title : Image Signal ProcessingPre Requisite : Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 8Total Hours PerWeek : 12Description : Image basics, geometric transformation of images, understanding image formation principles in pin-hole and real aperture cameras, image homography, image registration, image mosaicing, recovering 3D from 2D using different image cues, unitary image transforms and their relationship to 1D transforms, image enhancement techniques, image restoration methods, image superresolution, Course Content : Basics: Applications of image processing. notion of pixel, resolution, quantization, photon noise, Geometric transformations, source-to-target and target-to-source mapping, planar and rotational homography, RANSAC for homography estimation, image registration, change detection, and image mosaicing.Motion blur: Exposure time, weighted frame integration, depth aware warping, spatio-temporal averaging, dynamic scenes.Image Formation in Lens:Pin-hole versus real aperture lens model, lens as a 2D LSI system, blur circle, Doubly block circulant system matrix, pill box and Gaussian blur models, space invariant and space variant blurring.3D Shape from Focus:Depth of field, focal stack, focus operators, focus measure curve, Gaussian interpolation, 3D recovery, focused image recovery.Image Transforms:Data dependent and independent transforms, 1D Orthogonal trasnforms, Kronecker product, 2D orthogonal transforms from 1D, 2D DFT, 2D DFT for image matching, 2D DCT, Walsh-Haddamard transform, Karhunen-Loeve transform, eigenfilters, PCA for face recognition, singular value decomposition, image denoising using SVD.Photometric stereo: Normal estimation, depth reconstruction, uncalibrated PS, Generalized bas relief ambiguity. Image Enhancement:Thresholding methods (peak-valley, Otsu, Chow-Kaneko), histogram equalization and modification, Noise models, mean, weighted mean, median, weighted median, non-local means filter, BM3D, frequency domain filtering, illumination compensation by homomorphic filtering, segmentation by k-means clustering, higher-order statistics based clustering. Image Restoration:Well-posed and ill-posed problems, Fredholm-integral equation, condition number of matrix, conditional mean, Inverse filter, Wiener filter, ML and MAP restoration, image super-resolution.Edge Detection:Gradient operators, Prewitt, Sobel, Roberts, compass operators, LOG, DOG, Canny edge detectors, non-maxima suppression, hysteresis thresholding. Text Books : Digital Image Processing by Gonzalez and Woods. Reference Books : The essential guide to image processing by Alan Bovik. | 12 | 4 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 8 - 12 |

67 | EE5176 | Computational Photography Course No : EE5176Course Title : Computational PhotographyPre Requisite : EE5175 or instructor's consentExtended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 8Total Hours PerWeek : 12Description : To introduce basic concepts of computational photography, where the goal is to jointly design imaging optics and processing algorithms so as to capture more information about the visual scene. We will also introduce compressive sensing as part of the course as many computational cameras are indeed compressive sensing systems. Course Content : 1. Image formation and camera model 2. Coded computational imaging: Motion deblurring using coded exposure (flutter shutter), focus deblurring using coded aperture 3. Multi-image techniques: Panorama, flash no-flash photography, high dynamic range capture, focal stack, aperture-focus stack 4. Light field imaging: Light field acquisition using camera array, lenslet array, programmable coded aperture, heterodyne light field camera. Light field rendering. 5. Compressive sensing and dictionary learning: L0-L1 norm equivalence, dictionary learning and sparsity-based reconstruction 6. Compressive computational imaging: Single pixel camera, flutter shutter video camera, coded strobing photography, programmable pixel compressive camera, pixel-wise coded exposure, compressive light field, compressive hyper-spectral imaging 7. Illumination multiplexing, photometric stereo and structured light Text Books : 1. Computer Vision Algorithms and Applications, R. Szelisky, Springer, 2011. 2. Computational Photography: Mastering New Techniques for Lenses, Lighting, and Sensors, R. Raskar and J. Tumblin, A. K. Peters, 1st Edition, 2015. Reference Books : 1. Multi View Geometry in Computer Vision, R. Hartley and A. Zisserman, Cambridge University Press, 2004. 2. A Mathematical Introduction to Compressive Sensing, S. Foucart and H. Rauhat, Springer, 2013. | 12 | 4 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 8 - 12 |

68 | EE5177 | Machine Learning for Computer Vision Course No : EE5177Course Title : Machine Learning for Computer VisionPre Requisite : EE3110 and CoTExtended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 8Total Hours PerWeek : 0Description : The goal of this course is to introduce the various machine learning models that are needed for solving computer vision problems. Various probabilistic models are introduced first along with their associated learning and inference algorithms. The computer vision problems are then formulated in terms of them. The course will also be useful for those exclusively interested in machine learning. Course Content : 1. Probability: Common probability distributions such as Gaussian, Bernoulli, Dirichlet, etc.. Fitting probability models. 2. Machine Learning models and inference: Regression models such as linear regression, Bayesian regression, nonlinear regression, sparse linear regression. Classification models such as logistic regression, support vector machine, relevance vector machine, classification tree. 3. Graphical models: Directed and undirected graphical models; models for trees; Markov random fields; Conditional Markov fields. 4. Image pre-processing: Per-pixel transformation; interest point detection and description; dimensionality reduction. 5. Multi-view geometry: Pinhole camera; single view geometry; Projective transformation; Stereo and epipolar geometry; Multi-view reconstruction 6. Models for vision: Models for shape; Models for style and identity; temporal models; models for visual words Text Books : Computer Vision: Models, Learning and Inference, Simon J. D. Prince, Cambridge University Press, 2012. Reference Books : 1. Pattern Recognition and Machine Learning, C. M. Bishop, Springer, 2006. 2. Pattern Classification, R. O. Duda, P. E. Hart and D. G. Stork, Wiley 2000. 3. Computer Vision: A Modern Approch, D. A. Forsyth and J. Ponce, Pearson, 2003. 4. Computer Vision Algorithms and Applications, R. Szelisky, Springer, 2011. 5. Multi View Geometry in Computer Vision, R. Hartley and A. Zisserman, Cambridge University Press, 2004. | 12 | 3 - 1 - 0 - 0 - 8 - 0 |

69 | EE5180 | Introduction to Machine Learning Course No : EE5180Course Title : Introduction to Machine LearningPre Requisite : EE3110 or equivalent AND basics of linear algebra (vector, matrix, norm, eigenvalue, SVD, etc.)Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 8Total Hours PerWeek : 12Description : In this course, students will be exposed to some of the widely used machine learning ideas/techniques which have applications in electrical engineering and related areas. In addition, they will shown the strong connections that machine learning has with the traditional EE areas like information theory, detection and estimation theory, signal processing, and control. Course Content : 1. An introduction to machine learning: why and what. A comparison of artificial intelligence, machine learning, and widely adored deep neural networks. 2. The most fundamental problem of electrical engineering: decision making under uncertainty (elaborated with examples from communication and signal processing). Detection and estimation theory & machine learning: similarities and differences. 3. Supervised learning (discrete labels): signal detection without the knowledge of path loss and noise distribution, image recognition, etc. Linear classifier, support vector machine and kernel method. Logistic regression. 4. Supervised learning (continuous labels a.k.a. function learning): LTI system and channel estimation. Linear regression, support vector regression. 5. A brief tour of neural networks. Why function representation? Why NN? Why deep NN? Some architectures: convolutional neural networks (image processing), recurrent neural networks (communication and control). Training, backpropagation and SGD. 6. Unsupervised learning: vector quantization and clustering, k-means algorithm, spectral clustering 7. Sparse recovery: applications in signal processing. LASSO, ISTA. 8. Low dimensional structure in high dimensional data: PCA 9. Graphical model: a statistical model for error correction codes, social networks, etc. Markov random field (MRF), inference on MRF, learning MRF structure from data. 10. Reinforcement learning: applications in robotics and wireless scheduling. A brief introduction to Markov decision processes, TD(?) and Q-learning. Text Books : The course will follow different parts from different books and lecture notes. Here is a brief list of references. 1. Understanding Machine Learning: From Theory to Algorithms by Shai Shalev-Shwartz and Shai Ben-David 2. Machine Learning: A Probabilistic Perspective by Kevin P. Murphy 3. Reinforcement Learning: An Introduction by Richard S. Sutton and Andrew G. Barto 4. Deep Learning by Ian Goodfellow, Yoshua Bengio, and Aaron Courville Reference Books : 1. http://users.ece.utexas.edu/~sanghavi/courses/EE381V_spring2013.html 2. http://www.cs.cmu.edu/~ninamf/courses/601sp15/lectures.shtml | 12 | 3 - 1 - 0 - 0 - 8 - 12 |

70 | EE5182 | Computational Electromagnetics Course No : EE5182 Course Title : Computational ElectromagneticsPre Requisite : Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 8Total Hours PerWeek : 12Description : To teach fundamentals of computational analysis of problems in electromagnetism Course Content : Introduction: Overview of computational and numerical techniques in Electromagnetism, Review of electrostatics and magnetostatics, Difference equations, Taylor’s series and Truncation errors Solutions to Electromagnetic problems using finite difference time domain technique : Discrete one dimensional scalar wave equation, discrete Maxwell’s equations, Time harmonic plane wave analysis, The Yee algorithm in 2D and 3D for TMz and TEz polarization cases, Calculation of numerical dispersion relationship for 1D, 2D and 3D, Implementation of inhomogeneous and lossy optical media, Modeling of an optical source, The absorbing boundary condition and perfectly matched layers. Case studies : Light propagation in free space, in straight and bent dielectric waveguides, Propagation through photonic crystal structures, Couplers and Ring resonator structure. Solutions to EM problems using finite elements method : Cut-off values and eigen field distribution in Homogeneous waveguides, Vector formulation for determination of propagation constants and field distribution in inhomogeneous waveguides Case studies : Optical modes of rectangular waveguides, modes of a fiber, light propagation in waveguides Modeling of optical circuits in dielectrics : Beam Propagation Method Case studies : Long dielectric waveguides, Splitters, Interferometers Text Books : 1. Allen Taflove. Computational Electrodynamics–The finite difference time domain method, Artech House, 2005. 2. John L. Volakis, Arindam Chatterjee, Leo C. Finite Element Method for Electromagnetics. Kempel, 1998. Reference Books : NIL | 12 | 4 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 8 - 12 |

71 | EE5200 | Power Converter Analysis and Design Course No : EE5200Course Title : Power Converter Analysis and DesignPre Requisite : B.Tech/M.Tech./DD/M.S./PhDExtended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 6Total Hours PerWeek : 0Description : This course is a graduate level course for Electrical Engineering students. This course introduces the students to design aspects of various elements of both conventional and advanced power processing systems. This include both at the device level and also the system level. Course Content : Power Devices and their driving circuitry IGBT, Power MOSFET, IGCT, SCR – data sheet interpretation and gate drive Circuit Design, SiC MOSFET devices and their characteristics AC/DC Converters Review of three phase SCR bridge converters and performance analysis. Three phase and cascaded bridge structure with phase shifting transformer. IGBT front end converter and their control in sync ref frame (ref frames should be taken up in beginning section in machine modeling course for this) – four quadrant operation – resistance emulation methods. Single phase power factor correction circuits and control DC/AC converters Two level inverters: Selective Harmonic Elimination, SPWM, Space Vector. Advances in Space Vector Approach. Effect of dead time on performance and compensation schemes. Multilevel converters – NPC, Flying capacitor, and cascaded structures: Analysis and triggering schemes Matrix Converters and their operation – Structure and their methods of control Elements of Power Converter Design A given application power rating – selection of device, loss calculation, driving circuitry design, device protection, current/voltage sensors and their datasheets (LEM). Text Books : 1. B. K. Bose, Power Electronics and Ac Drives, Prentice Hall, 1986. 2. Marty Brown, Power Supply Cookbook, Newnes Publishers, 2001. 3. D.G.Holmes, Thomas.A.Lipo, Pulse Width Modulation for Power Converters – Principles and Practice, John Wiley & Sons Publishers, 2003. Reference Books : 4. N.Mohan, T.M.Undeland and W.P.Robbins, Power Electronics, John Wiley & Sons Publishers, 1993. 5. L.Umanand, Power Electroncis – Essentials and Applications, Wiley India, 2009. | 9 | 3 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 6 - 0 |

72 | EE5201 | Modelling and Analysis of Electric Machines Course No : EE5201Course Title : Modelling and Analysis of Electric MachinesPre Requisite : Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 6Total Hours PerWeek : 9Description : This course aims to take the student through the mathematics involved in the development of models for electrical machines. The course lays the foundations for studying the dynamics of power systems and control of motor drives. Course Content : Fundamentals Magnetic Fields Magnetic Circuit Singly Excited Linear Motion System Linear and Cylindrical Motion Systems Systems with Multiple Excitations Non-linear Magnetic Systems Windings and inductances Inductances in Constant Air gap Machines Inductance in Salient Pole Machine Inductances of Distributed Winding Dynamic Equations of Induction Machines Dynamic Equations of Salient Pole Synchronous Machine Transformations and DC Machine Three-to-Two Phase Transformation Induction Machine in Two-Phase Reference Frame The Pseudo-Stationary Reference Frame Induction Machine in Pseudo-Stationary Reference Frame The Primitive Machine Equations Dynamic Equations of DC Machines Small Signal Model of DC Machine Small Signal Behaviour of DC Machine Further transformations and AC machines The Arbitrary Reference Frame Induction Machine Equations in Arbitrary, Synchronous Reference Frames and Small Signal Modelling Introduction to Field Oriented Control of Induction Machines Space Vector Formulation of Induction Machine Equations Modelling of Salient Pole Synchronous Machines Steady State Models – Induction Machine Steady State Models – Salient Pole Synchronous Machine Solution of Dynamic Equations of Induction Machine Dynamics of Threee Phase alternators Reactances of Salient Pole Synchronous Machines Sudden Short Circuit of Three Phase Alternator – Analytical Solution Sudden Short Circuit of Three Phase Alternator – Numerical Simulation Text Books : 1. PC Krause, Amalysis of Electric Machinery, McGraw Hill 2. Introduction to Generalized Machine Theory, O'Kelly and Simmons, McGraaw Hill Reference Books : 1. C V Jones, Unified Theory of Electric Machines 2. N. Hancock, Matrix Analysis of Electric Machinery, Pergamon Press | 9 | 3 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 6 - 9 |

73 | EE5202 | Computer Aided Design of Electrical Machines Course No : EE5202Course Title : Computer Aided Design of Electrical MachinesPre Requisite : Electrical MachinesExtended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 6Total Hours PerWeek : 0Description : This course is an advanced level graduate course for students having electrical machines background. The objective of the course is to introduce the students to the design perspectives of various electro-magnetic and electro-mechanical systems. It also aims to expose the students to the use of FE simulation tools in the design process. Course Content : Design Perspective of Electromagnetic Equipment - relevance of computer tools in machine design and the design process. Magnetic Field, inductance and magnetic circuits. Ferromagnetism - properties of ferromagnetic materials. Permeability and its various forms - initial, amplitude, incremental, reversible, effective and complex permeability. Soft and Hard magnetic materials. Types of steel - properties and standards. Current materials, ferrites, amorphous and nano-crystalline. Windings - materials, skin effect. Conductor in a slot - leakage fluxes and current density variations - loss comparison of single bar and subdivided conductors. Conductor transposition. Types of windings - form and random, litz Solenoid Design - geometry and force prediction, design for specifications. Force from energy considerations and inductance variation. Introduction to FEMM software and design validation of solenoid through FE Analysis. Transformer Design: basic design equation, winding layers and the design process. Leakage inductance estimation - use of FEMM in design and validations. Machine Design - derivation of the fundamental design equation and machine constant - arriving at main dimensions of a machine. Carter's coefficient and its use in determining air gap flux density. Synchronous Generator Design - determination of total mmf requirement - rotor pole design and shaping - FE verification - pole shoe, stator teeth and stator / rotor yokes. Permanent magnet materials and their characteristics - design and magnet selection for magnet-core-air gap geometry - temperature effects - selection of operating point. Stator design - integral slot and fractional slot winding. Use of slot star diagram. Distribution factor, pitch factor. Examples of winding design - single and double layer - symmetry conditions. Skew factor and slot harmonics. Assignments: Solenoid Design, Transformer Design, Wound field alternator design, BLDC machine design, PM alternator design. Text Books : 1. Performance and Design of AC Machines: MG Say, McGraw Hill 2. Finite Elements for Electrical Engineers: Nicholas Bianchi, CRC Press Reference Books : 3. Design of Rotating Electrical Machines: Juha Pyrhonen, Tapani Jokinen and Valeria Hrabovcova, Wiley. | 9 | 3 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 6 - 0 |

74 | EE5203 | Switched Mode Power Conversion Course No : EE5203Course Title : Switched Mode Power ConversionPre Requisite : Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 6Total Hours PerWeek : 9Description : To familiarise students with the techniques of modelling of converter topologies and their impact on the development of control strategies. Course Content : ) Power Converters • Introduction, DC-DC Converter: Linear regulators, switched mode converters: Topologies, Non-isolated/isolated, constituent elements, operating principles, steady state analysis and Steady state model in continuous and Discontinuous mode of operation. Steady-State Equivalent Circuit Modelling, Losses, and Efficiency, Techniques of Design-Oriented Analysis with application to switching converters. 2) Modelling of switching converters • AC Equivalent circuit modelling of converters and simulation of converters operating in continuous mode, State Space averaged model, averaged switch modelling, canonical circuit model, transfer functions of switching converters. 3) Control Schemes and controller design • Popular techniques for controlling switching converters: Voltage control, current programmed control: Average-current, peak-current-mode, Effects of current mode control on basic transfer functions, Frequency control techniques. • Controller design in frequency Domain • Concepts on application of non linear control techniques to power converters. 4) Soft Switching converters ZVS/ZCS schemes, Topologies and control and analysis of various resonant / soft-switching dc-dc converters Text Books : 1) R. W. Erickson and D. Maksimovic , “Fundamentals of Power Electronics”, 2nd edition, Springer Science and Business Media Inc. Reference Books : 1) Issa Batarseh, Power Electronic Circuits, John Wiley, 2004. 2) Philip T krein, Elements of Power Electronics, Oxford Press. 3) Marian P. Kazmierkowski, R. Krishnan and Frede Blaabjerg, ”Control in Power Electronics”, A volume in Academic Press Series in Engineering | 9 | 3 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 6 - 9 |

75 | EE5204 | Electric Vehicles and Renewable Energy Course No : EE5204Course Title : Electric Vehicles and Renewable EnergyPre Requisite : Must have done basic engineering coursesExtended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 6Total Hours PerWeek : 9Description : A systems course to understand the fundamentals of Electric Vehicles (EVs) and Renewable Energy, especially in Indian Context. Course Content : 1. India’s energy Scenario 2. India’s road-transport and importance of EVs in India 3. Centralised and Decentralised Power generation systems using Solar PV: technology and economics; solar-DC systems; bi-directional grid synchronisation 4. Centralised and Decentralised Wind Power systems: technology and economics 5. Other Renewable Energy sources 6. Grid-storage for Renewable Energy 7. System level analysis of power consumed in EVs; Electric Vehicle architecture and sub-systems 8. Batteries for EVs 9. Electric Drive-trains: Motors, controllers, DC-DC converters, other subsystems 10. EV Chargers and battery-Swappers 11. Cost-challenges of EVs in India and the world 12. Electric 2-wheelrs, 3-wheelers, 4-wheelers, buses, small goods-vehicles Text Books : 1. Electric Powertrain - Energy Systems, Power electronics and drives for Hybrid, electric and fuel cell vehicles by john G Hayes and A. Goodarzi, Wiley Publication. Reference Books : additional materials will be announced in class | 9 | 3 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 6 - 9 |

76 | EE5205 | Fundamentals of Electric vehicles: Technology & Economics Course No : EE5205Course Title : Fundamentals of Electric vehicles: Technology & EconomicsPre Requisite : COT from teacherExtended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 0Total Hours PerWeek : 0Description : To provide a overview of the multiple considerations to be looked at in the domain of electric vehicles. Aspects of economics, motors and controls, vehicle dynamics, battery and its management system, charging and swapping and the management of EV infrastructure. Course Content : Introduction: Why EV? Comparison with ICE vehicle, Can India drive its EV program differently. Batteries, Charging infrastructure, slow and fast charging; standards, raw-materials for batteries, Vehicle drive-train (2 hrs) Vehicle Dynamics: Forces acting when a vehicle moves, Rolling resistance, aerodynamics, Slope and acceleration, Drive Cycles, Energy and requirements, Examples – 2-wheelers, 3W, 4W, buses and trucks. (6 hrs) Electric Drive-train: Speed, power and energy requirement, Batteries: ratings, cell types, charging rates, pack design, thermals, BMS, pacl assemblies and case studies with details. (14 hrs) Accessories: Power-steering, Power-brakes, air-conditioners and heaters, others (1 hrs) Battery Charging: Charging Fundamentals, Charger Architecture, Charging profiles, temperature, Charging protocols, Connectors. Types of Chargers and Charging Standards, Charging Infrastructure, Swapping Infrastructure, Monitoring and analytics (6 hrs) Text Books : None Reference Books : 1. IEEE Electrification Magazine: https://ieeexplore.ieee.org/document/8546812 2. Blog “understanding the EV Elephant”: http://electric-vehicles-in-india.blogspot.com/ 3. Zero Emission Vehicle(ZEV): Towards a policy Framework http://movesummit.in/files/EV_report.pdf 4. 'A Guidance Document on Accelerating Electric Mobility in India' https://wri-india.org/sites/default/files/Accelerating%20electric%20mobility%20in%20India_WRI%20India_CBEEVIITM.pdf | 6 | 2 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 0 |

77 | EE5212 | Digital Controller for power Applications Course No : EE5212Course Title : Digital Controller for power ApplicationsPre Requisite : Switched Mode Power ConversionExtended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 4Total Hours PerWeek : 0Description : To teach the students the applications of digital controllers for power electronic applications. Course Content : Theory: Numeric Systems (Fixed and Floating Point Representation), Architecture of DSP’s C2000 , Memory Mapping in DSP, Peripheral Modules, Per Unitization in Power processing systems for digital control, Discretization in Z-domain and its advantages in digital control, Instruction sets in c2000 and its optimal usage for power applications.Lab: Installation, configuration and initialization in C2000, Interfacing with DAC, Interfacing with ADC, generation of saw tooth and triangular waveforms, PWM generation, Understanding digital control of DC DC converters, Generation of sine wave and viewing in DAC, V/f control of Induction motor, Example programs for communication interfaces like I2C interface, RS232 interface, understanding the encoder features in C2000 for drive application. Text Books : 1. Digital Power Electronics and Applications, Fang Lin La, Hing Ye, MhD Rashid.2. Digital Control of Dynamic Systems Gene.J.Franklin, J.David Powell, Michael Workman.3. Mixed Signal and DSP Design Techniques, Analog Devices Inc************************************************************* Reference Books : 3. Mixed Signal and DSP Design Techniques, Analog Devices Inc | 9 | 2 - 0 - 3 - 0 - 4 - 0 |

78 | EE5241 | Robust Optimal Control Course No : EE5241Course Title : Robust Optimal ControlPre Requisite : COTExtended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 6Total Hours PerWeek : 9Description : Basic control design courses, such as EC3210, deal with design of controllers for SISO systems. And the control design techniques presented therein have now become classical. This course will introduce students to modern control design techniques. Specifically, the course deals with design of controllers for MIMO systems with emphasis on H8 methods. Course Content : Review: Classical Control, Root locus, Nyquist Plots, Robustness and Disturbance rejection in SISO systems. Multivariable Linear Systems: Continuous time State space models, Discrete time state models. Transfer-functions, Frequency response, Poles, Zeros and Modes. Stability, Change of Basis, Controllability Observeability and Observer Feedback. Performance Measures: General Models of feedback Control Systems. Norms and Cost functions. Robustness: Internal Stability, Structured and Unstructured uncertainty models and their robustness analysis. H8 Control: Full information control, H8 Estimation, H8 Output feedback, Finite time control, Steady State Control and µ Synthesis. Text Books : 1. J B Burl, Linear Optimal Control H2 and H8 Methods, Addison Wesley, California, US, 1999. 2. K. Zhou, J C Doyle and K Glover, Robust and Optimal control, prentice-Hall, 1999. 3. S Skogstad and I Postlethwaite, Multivariable Feedback control, John Wiley and Sons, 2005. 4. T Glad and L Ljung, Control Theory: Multivariable and Non-Linear methods, Taylor and Francis, London, 2009. Reference Books : ----------- | 9 | 3 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 6 - 9 |

79 | EE5253 | Computer Methods in Power Systems Analysis Course No : EE5253Course Title : Computer Methods in Power Systems AnalysisPre Requisite : EE3003 for B.Tech and Dual Degree studentsExtended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 6Total Hours PerWeek : 9Description : The objective of the course is to give an introduction to the computational algorithms for various analyses required for power system operation. Course Content : Load flow studies – triangular factorization, sparse matrix techniques Fault analysis – open conductor faults Economic dispatch with losses State estimation – method of least squares, observability, bad data detection Contingency analysis – use of dc model, linear sensitivity factors Stability analysis – computation of eigenvalues, numerical integration of differential and differential-algebraic equations Text Books : 1. Mariesa Crow, “Computational Methods for Electric Power Systems”, CRC Press, 2003 2. John J Grainger and William D Stevenson Jr., “Power System Analysis”, Tata McGraw Hill, 1994 Reference Books : 1. Allen J Wood and Bruce F Wollenberg, “Power Generation, Operation and Control”, 2nd Edition, John Wiley and Sons, 1996 2. George L Kusic, “Computer-Aided Power Systems Analysis”, Prentice-Hall of India, 1986 | 9 | 3 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 6 - 9 |

80 | EE5254 | High Voltage Technology Course No : EE5254Course Title : High Voltage TechnologyPre Requisite : Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 6Total Hours PerWeek : 9Description : To demonstrate and tell students the fundamental aspects of high voltage generations, measurements and testing of power apparatus. Course Content : Generation and measurement of high AC, DC and transient votlages. fundamental aspects of insulation engineering, Power apparatus testing and life estimation of power apparatus. Text Books : E. Kuffel, W.S. Zaengl and J. Kuffel, High voltage Engineering fundamentals, Newnes, 2000 Reference Books : M.S. Naidu and Kamaraju, High voltage Engineering, Second Edition, McGraw-Hill, 1996. | 9 | 3 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 6 - 9 |

81 | EE5256 | Computer Applications in Power System Operation and Planning Course No : EE5256Course Title : Computer Applications in Power System Operation and PlanningPre Requisite : EE5253Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 6Total Hours PerWeek : 0Description : The following are the objectives of this course: • Understanding how computers applications are used in power systems for operation, and planning. • Practical industrial applications of computers in power systems Course Content : Basic Concepts of Computer Applications in Power Systems; Multi-Level structure Grouping of various computer based applications of power systems. Real Time Modeling and System Studies Power System State Estimation: Problem formulation, Mathematical formulation, Solution Approaches, Case Study, Complete System State Estimation, Bad Data Processing, Decomposition techniques in Power System State Estimation. Large Scale State Estimation. Power System Security: Security Assessment and Analysis, Security Assessment Studies. Solution methods, Case Study and Simulation Example, Security Constrained Studies. Contingency Analysis and Network Outage Simulation. Solution methods, Case Study and Simulation Examples. Applications to Smart Power Grids Power System Economics, Electric Power Markets, Trading and Energy Brokerage. Economic Dispatch (ED) and Unit Commitment (UC). Mathematical formulation, Solution Approaches Security Constrained ED and UC Optimal Power Flow, Problem Formulation, Mathematical formulation, Solution Approaches, Case Study, Security Constrained Optimal Power Flow. Operational Planning, Maintenance Scheduling, Expansion Planning studies (Generation and Transmission Explanation Planning) Text Books : 1. Frauendorfer, K.”Optimization in the Planning and Operation of Electric Power Systems”, Spinger Verlag, 1992. 2. Wood, A. J and Wollenberg, B. F, “Power Generation Operation and Control”, 2nd Edition John Wiley and Sons, 2003. 3. Arillaga, J. “Computer Modeling of Electric Power Systems”, John Wiley, 2001. Reference Books : 4. Knight, U. G, “Power Systems Engineering and Mathematics”, Addison Wesley, 1992. 5. Wallach, Y “Calculations and Programs in Power Systems Networks”, Prentice Hall, 1986. 6. Handschin, E. “Real Time Control of Electric Power Systems”, Elsevier, 1972. 7. Savelescu S, “Computerized Operation of Electric Power Systems”, Elsevier, 1978. | 9 | 3 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 6 - 0 |

82 | EE5257 | Energy Management Systems and SCADA Course No : EE5257Course Title : Energy Management Systems and SCADAPre Requisite : Power SystemsExtended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 6Total Hours PerWeek : 9Description : This course provides an introduction various to Energy Management Systems (EMS) Applications in Power Systems, which includes various network analysis programs and methods which are executed in the load dispatch center. Introduction to the hardware and software components of SCADA (Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition), which is an interface between the Physical Power System and the EMS programs, will be discussed with latest developments and advancements. Integration of EMS and SCADA for various applications will be discussed and studied. Leaning Outcomes: The students will learn about the various Applications Programs (Aps) running in an Energy Management Systems (EMS) and Their execution through SCADA. Development of some of the important algorithms in an EMS and case studies SCADA will be considered. Course Content : 1. Energy Management Systems Introduction: Introduction and Evolution of EMS from Control Centers to Energy Control Centers to EMS. Functions and Benefits of EMS; SEBs Monitoring and Control. Architecture and Applications: Various Architecture of EMS, On / Off Line Functions of EMS, Real Time Modeling and Applications of EMS: Energy Management Systems Control: Automatic Generation Control (AGC). Load Frequency Control (LFC), Voltage Reactive Power Control (VQC); Case Studies of Energy Management Systems: Security Assessment; Dispatch, Contingency analysis. Study Mode Applications: Forecasting: Power Flow, Optimal Power Flow, State Estimation, Security Assessment. 2. SCADA (Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition) Introduction and Evolution of SCADA, Functions and Benefits of SCADA, Various Architecture of SCADA. Modules and Components of SCADA. SCADA Hardware RTU; IED SAS Architectures. SCADA Software IEC618950; Protocol GOOSE; Configurations of SCADA, RTU (Remote Terminal Units) Connections. SCADA Communication requirements, protocols: Past Present and Future. Applications of SCADA i) Power Systems; ii) Railways, iii) Renewal Energy and iv)Smart Grid; Power SCADA: Automation; Protection; Relay Interoperability Text Books : 1. E. Handschin . A. Petroian “Energy Management Systems Operation and Control of Electric Energy Transmission Systems” Springer-Verlag, 1991 2. Gordon Clarke, Deon Reynders, Edwin Wright, Practical Modern SCADA Protocols: DNP3, 60870.5 and Related Systems, Elsevier, 2004. Reference Books : 3. Richard A. Panke , “Energy Management Systems And Direct Digital Control” , The Fairmont Press, 2003. 4. David Bailey,Edwin Wright, Practical SCADA for Industry, Elsevier, 2003. 5. R William Payne, John J. McGowan, Energy Management And Control Systems, Handbook, 1988. | 9 | 3 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 6 - 9 |

83 | EE5260 | Power Quality Course No : EE5260Course Title : Power QualityPre Requisite : Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 6Total Hours PerWeek : 9Description : The course aims to provide basic understanding of power quality aspects in power systems, especially in power distribution networks. It brings clarity on various issues related to power quality problems, their quantification, analysis and interpretation. In this course, students will develop skills to analyze power quality in power systems and provide appropriate solutions using custom power devices. Course Content : 1. Power quality aspects in power system, power quality indices, power quality standards, terms and definitions. 2. Brief Introduction to power quality problems mitigation devices in power distribution system (custom power devices), Application of power electronic controllers in power system, Distribution Static compensators, DSTATCOM), Dynamic Voltage Restores (DVR), Unified Power Quality Conditioner (UPQC), Static Power Transfer Switches (SPTS) etc. 3. Study on various transformations to analyze three phase systems. 4. Power definitions and components for single phase and three-phase systems. 5. Theory of fundamental unbalanced load compensation. 6. Theories of load compensation with unbalanced and harmonic components shunt active power filters or compensators, working of DSTATCOM, design and performance aspects. 7. Series compensation using dynamic voltage restorer (DVR), principle of operation, analysis and design aspects of DVR. 8. Shunt and series compensation using UPQC. Text Books : Power Quality Enhancement using Custom Power Devices, Arindam ghosh and G. Ledwich, Kluwer Academic, 2002. Reference Books : 1. NPTEL web course Power Quality in Power Distribution book by Prof. Mahesh Kumar, Department of Electrical Engineering, IIT Madras, Chennai India, NPTEL-IIT Madras, 2012. 2. Electric Power System Quality by Roger C. Dugan, Mark F. McGranaghan, Surya Santoso and H. Wayne Beaty, McGraw-Hill, 2nd edition, 2008. 3. Power Quality in Power System and Electrical Machines by Ewald Fuchs, Mohammad A. S. and Masoum, Elsevier, 2008. 4. Power Quality: Problems and Mitigation Techniques, Bhim Singh, Ambrish Chandra, Kamal Al-Haddad, Wiley, 2015. 5. Instantaneous Power Theory and Applications to Power Conditioning, H. Akagi, Edson H. Watanabe, M. Aredes, Wiley, 2007. 6. Understanding Power quality Problems By Math H. J. Bollen, Wiley-IEEE Press, 1999. 7. Handbook of Power Quality by an Edited by Angelo Baggini, Wiley-IEEE Press, 2008. | 9 | 3 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 6 - 9 |

84 | EE5261 | Flexible AC Transmission Systems Course No : EE5261Course Title : Flexible AC Transmission SystemsPre Requisite : Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 6Total Hours PerWeek : 9Description : 1. To expose the students to an emerging technology whereby existing transmission network can be better utilized by increasing its usable capacity 2. To introduce the concept of transmission network control by incorporating power electronic devices Course Content : Principles of power flow control and voltage control in transmission network Static VAR Compensator – Configuration and Controller Thyristor Controlled Series Capacitor – Operation, Analysis and Control Voltage Source Converter based FACTS Controllers Static Synchronous Compensator – Analysis, Control, Multipulse converter, Multilevel Converter Static Synchronous Series Compensator – Control Multiconverter devices – Unified Power Flow Controller, Interline Power Flow Controller, Convertible Static Compensator Modeling of FACTS for load flow analysis and system stability studies Text Books : 1. FACTS Controllers in Power Transmission and Distribution by K.R. Padiyar, New Age International Publishers, 2007. Reference Books : 1. Understanding FACTS – Concepts and Technology of Flexible AC Transmission Systems by N.G. Higorani and L. Gyugyi, IEEE Press, New York, 2000. 2. Thyristor-based FACTS Controller for Electrical Transmission Systems by R.M. Mathur and R.K.Varma, IEEE Press and Wiley Interscience, New York, 2002. 3. Flexible AC Transmission Systems (FACTS), edited by Y.H. Song and A.T. Johns, IEE Press, London, 1999. | 9 | 3 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 6 - 9 |

85 | EE5262 | Distributed Generation and Microgrid Systems Course No : EE5262Course Title : Distributed Generation and Microgrid SystemsPre Requisite : B. Tech./DD with power electronics (EE3203)Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 6Total Hours PerWeek : 9Description : This course is a graduate level course for Electrical Engineering students in the area of distributed generation and microgrid systems. The course introduces the students to microgrid systems, its various components, control and operation. The emphasis will be laid on understanding of integrated operation of microgrid system interacting renewable generation, storage, local load and ac grid. Course Content : Introduction to AC and DC microgrid systems, distributed generation consisting of AC and DC type renewable energy sources (RES) with a focus on photo voltaic and wind energy systems, their modeling, analysis, design and applications in microgrid connected systems. Maximum power extraction schemes for the RES, application of AC-DC, DC-DC converters for extracting maximum power and their integration with common DC bus. Storage systems consisting of battery, supercapacitors, their modeling, analysis, design and applications in microgrid, integration of storage system with the DC grid using bidirectional DC-DC converters. DC and AC grid integration using voltage source converters (VSC), control strategies for VSC to operate it in standalone or grid connected mode, power flow, energy management systems and power quality issues in microgrid systems. Text Books : S.P. Chowdhury, P. Crossley, S. Chowdhury "Microgrids and Active Distribution Networks" Published by The Institution of Engineering and Technology, London, UK, 2009. Reference Books : [1] Sudipta Chakraborty, Marcelo G. Simões, and William E. Kramer, " Power Electronics for Renewable and Distributed Energy Systems: A Sourcebook of Topologies, Control and Integration", Springer Science & Business, 2013. [2] Remus Teodorescu, Marco Liserre, Pedro Rodriguez, "Grid Converters for Photovoltaic and Wind Power Systems", John Wiley and Sons, Ltd., 2011. [3] Ali Keyhani, "Design of Smart Power Grid Renewable Energy Systems", Wiley-IEEE Press, 2011. [4] D.Mukherjee, "Fundamentals Of Renewable Energy Systems", New Age International publishers, 2007. [5] C. S. Solanki: Renewable Energy Technologies: Practical Guide For Beginneers, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd., 2008. | 9 | 3 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 6 - 9 |

86 | EE5310 | Analog Electronic circuits Course No : EE5310Course Title : Analog Electronic circuitsPre Requisite : NoneExtended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 8Total Hours PerWeek : 12Description : Learning objectives:This course is an introduction to amplifiers using transistors. Students will be introduced to MOS transistors, their characteristics, techniques for biasing them, and amplifiers using them. The basic transistor amplifier stages are seen as realizations of different controlled sources using negative feedback. Small- and large-signal characteristics of each amplifier will be discussed. Frequency ompensation techniques to stabilise higher order systems will be discussed.Learning Outcomes:At the end of this course, students should be able to recognize and analyze the basic amplifiers and biasing arrangements using MOS or bipolar transistors. Students should also be able to perform dominant-pole compensation of higher order systems and stabilise them. Course Content : 1) MOS transistor characteristics; small signal model2) Common source amplifier, frequency response, Miller effect3) Introduction to negative feedback; Closed loop behavior of first, second and third order systems in a feedback loop; Gain and Phase margin4) Dominant pole compensation; Pole splitting5) Controlled sources using MOS transistors and opamps6) Swing limits of amplifiers7) pMOS transistor; Active load; CMOS inverter; Differential pair8) Single stage and Two stage opamps; Miller compensation;9) Bipolar junction transistor Text Books : 1) Microelectronic Circuits: Theory and ApplicationsAuthors: Adel S. Sedra, Kenneth C. Smith and Arun N. ChandorkarPublisher: Oxford; Sixth edition (11 March 2013)ISBN-10: 0198089139ISBN-13: 978-0198089131 Reference Books : NIL | 12 | 3 - 1 - 0 - 0 - 8 - 12 |

87 | EE5310W | Analog Electronic circuits Course No : EE5310WCourse Title : Analog Electronic circuitsPre Requisite : NONEExtended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 8Total Hours PerWeek : 12Description : Learning objectives:This course is an introduction to amplifiers using transistors. Students will be introduced to MOS transistors, their characteristics, techniques for biasing them, and amplifiers using them. The basic transistor amplifier stages are seen as realizations of different controlled sources using negative feedback. Small- and large-signal characteristics of each amplifier will be discussed. Frequency ompensation techniques to stabilise higher order systems will be discussed.Learnin Course Content : 1) MOS transistor characteristics; small signal model2) Common source amplifier, frequency response, Miller effect3) Introduction to negative feedback; Closed loop behavior of first, second and third order systems in a feedback loop; Gain and Phase margin4) Dominant pole compensation; Pole splitting5) Controlled sources using MOS transistors and opamps6) Swing limits of amplifiers7) pMOS transistor; Active load; CMOS inverter; Differential pair8) Single stage and Two stage opamps; Miller compensation;9) Bipolar junction transistor Text Books : 1) Microelectronic Circuits: Theory and ApplicationsAuthors: Adel S. Sedra, Kenneth C. Smith and Arun N. ChandorkarPublisher: Oxford; Sixth edition (11 March 2013)ISBN-10: 0198089139ISBN-13: 978-0198089131 Reference Books : NIL | 12 | 3 - 1 - 0 - 0 - 8 - 12 |

88 | EE5311 | Digital IC Design Course No : EE5311Course Title : Digital IC DesignPre Requisite : Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 8Total Hours PerWeek : 12Description : Learning Objectives: 1. Characterize the key delay and power quantities of a standard cell 2. Design a circuit to perform a certain functionality with specified speed 3. Identify the critical path of a combinational circuit 4. Convert the combinational block to pipelined circuit 5. Calculate the maximum (worst case) operating frequency of the designed circuit Learning Objectives for each Module CMOS Transistor 1. Explain short channel effects(SCE) like Drain Induced Barrier Lowering, Gate Induced Drain Leakage, Sub-threshold leakage, Channel length modulation 2. Derive the equation for ON current of a CMOS transistor with first order SCE CMOS Inverter 1. Explain the functioning of a CMOS inverter 2. Explain the Voltage Transfer Characteristics of an inverter 3. Derive an expression for the trip point of an inverter 4. Derive an expression for the delay of an inverter driving a load 5. Derive expressions for Static, Dynamic and Short Circuit power of an inverter. 6. Explain the optimum voltage for minimum energy consumption 7. Explain the noise margin of an inverter and qualitatively explain minimum VDD Interconnects 1. Explain the origin of parasitics and build simple RC models for interconnects 2. Use Elmore delay model to estimate wire delay 3. Explain the conditions for using a lumped, lumped RC, distributed rc and transmission line Combinational Logic 1. Explain logical effort (LE) and electrical effort (EE) 2. Derive the optimum number of buffers with their sizes to drive a load. 3. Implement any arbitrary boolean function in Static CMOS logic 4. Derive logical effort for any gate built in any style of logic 5. Optimize the path delay of arbitrary gates driving a load capacitance 6. Implement logic functions using ratio'd logic 7. Use the pass transistor to implement simple gates like MUX and XORs 8. Explain basic domino logic 9. Explain stacking effect and the use of sleep transistors Sequential Circuits 1. Build elementary sequential circuits like latches and flip flops 2. Explain the origin of set up and hold time 3. Design a pipelined system to satisfy a throughput. 4. Explain latch/ flip flop based pipeline systems 5. Account for clock jiter and skew while designing pipelined systems 6. Calculate the maximum clock frequency of operation of a pipelined system Arithmetic Building Blocks 1. Construct CMOS circuits for basic full adders 2. Explain variants of adders, Carry-Look-Ahead, Save,Mux 3. Explain basic multipliers and it's variants. Booth multiplier Memories 1. Explain the working of the 6T SRAM circuit 2. Size the 6 transistors for functionality 3. Mark the Hold/ Read/ Write noise margins on a VTC Course Content : CMOS Transistor CMOS Inverter Interconnects Combinational Logic Sequential Circuits Arithmetic Building Blocks Memories Text Books : 1. Digital Integrated Circuits Jan M. Rabaey, Anantha Chandrakasan and Borivoje Nikolic 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall India 2. CMOS VLSI Design, Neil H.E. Weste, David Harris and Ayan Banerjee, 3rd Edition, Pearson Education Reference Books : Some relevant papers from IEEE | 12 | 4 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 8 - 12 |

89 | EE5311W | Digital IC Design Course No : EE5311WCourse Title : Digital IC DesignPre Requisite : Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 8Total Hours PerWeek : 12Description : Course Content : CMOS TransistorCMOS InverterInterconnectsCombinational LogicSequential CircuitsArithmetic Building BlocksMemories Text Books : 1. Digital Integrated Circuits Jan M. Rabaey, Anantha Chandrakasan and Borivoje Nikolic 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall India2. CMOS VLSI Design, Neil H.E. Weste, David Harris and Ayan Banerjee, 3rd Edition, Pearson Education Reference Books : Some relevant papers from IEEE | 12 | 4 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 8 - 12 |

90 | EE5312 | VLSI Technology Course No : EE5312Course Title : VLSI TechnologyPre Requisite : EE3301Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 8Total Hours PerWeek : 12Description : This course is a course to introduce the students to the technology involved in IC processing. The course, mostly restricted to silicon ICs, is divided into two parts. First, the unique structure of silicon is introduced and production of silicon wafers is discussed. The unit processes required for IC manufacturing, viz oxidation, diffusion, lithography, etching, etc are each discussed in detail. These processes are then used in making MOSFETs and BJTs and ICs based on these devices. There is emphasis on improving the performance and reliability. Some recent trends in silicon ICs will also be covered. Course Content : Introduction: Overview of VLSI Crystal structure and Single Crystal growth of silicon Epitaxy Oxidation Diffusion Ion-implantation Lithography Dry and Wet Etching Chemical Vapour Deposition of thin films Metallization MOSFET process flow with a view towards performance improvement BJT Process flow with a view towards performance improvement Current trends and challenges Text Books : VLSI Fabrication Principles by S.K.Ghandhi, Wiley 2008 VLSI Technology ed. S.M.SZE, McGrawHill 2003 Silicon VLSI Technology by J.D. Plummer, M.D.Deal and P.B.Griffin, Pearson 2009 Reference Books : Microfabrication by Marc Madou VLSI Technology, NPTEL course by Nandita DasGupta | 12 | 4 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 8 - 12 |

91 | EE5313 | Semiconductor Device Modelling Course No : EE5313Course Title : Semiconductor Device ModellingPre Requisite : NoneExtended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 8Total Hours PerWeek : 12Description : The first objective is to develop concepts about basic semiconductor properties and carrier transport in semiconductors. Using these concepts, students should be able to understand the principles of operation and develop models for semiconductor devices like diodes, BJTs and MOSFETs. Course Content : Semiconductors: Energy bands; Thermal equilibrium carrier concentration. Excess carriers, quasi Fermi levels; Recombination of carriers, lifetime. Carrier transport by drift, mobility; Carrier transport by diffusion; Continuity equation. Diffusion length. Quantitative theory of PN junctions: Steady state I-V characteristics under forward bias, reverse bias and illumination. Capacitances. Dynamic behavior under small and large signals. Breakdown mechanisms. Quantitative theory of bipolar junction transistors having uniformly doped regions. Static characteristics in active and saturation regions. Emitter efficiency, transport factor, transit time. Theory of Field Effect Transistors : Static characteristics of JFETs. Analysis of MOS capacitor. Calculation of threshold voltage. Static I-V characteristics of MOSFETs and their models. Text Books : 1. B.G. Streetman and S. Banerjee, Solid State Electronic Devices, Prentice Hall, New Jersey. 2. S.M. Sze, Semiconductor Devices Physics and Technology, John Wiley and Sons, New York. 3. D. A. Neamen, Semiconductor Physics and Devices, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd., New Delhi. 4. K.N. Bhat and M.K. Achuthan, Fundamentals of Semiconductor Devices, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd., New Delhi. 5. N. DasGupta and A. DasGupta, Semiconductor Devices Modelling and Technology, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi. Reference Books : 1. A.S. Grove, Physics and Technology of Semiconductor Devices, Wiley, New York. 2. S.M. Sze, Physics of Semiconductor Devices, Wiley, New York. 3. M.S. Tyagi, Introduction to Semiconductor Materials and Devices, John Wiley and Sons, New York. | 12 | 4 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 8 - 12 |

92 | EE5313W | Semiconductor Device Modelling Course No : EE5313WCourse Title : Semiconductor Device ModellingPre Requisite : Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 4Total Hours PerWeek : 12Description : The first objective is to develop concepts about basic semiconductor properties and carrier transport in semiconductors. Using these concepts, students should be able to understand the principles of operation and develop models for semiconductor devices like diodes, BJTs and MOSFETs. Course Content : Semiconductors: Energy bands; Thermal equilibrium carrier concentration. Excess carriers, quasi Fermi levels; Recombination of carriers, lifetime.Carrier transport by drift, mobility; Carrier transport by diffusion; Continuity equation. Diffusion length.Quantitative theory of PN junctions: Steady state I-V characteristics under forward bias, reverse bias and illumination. Capacitances. Dynamic behavior under small and large signals. Breakdown mechanisms.Quantitative theory of bipolar junction transistors having uniformly doped regions. Static characteristics in active and saturation regions. Emitter efficiency, transport factor, transit time.Theory of Field Effect Transistors : Static characteristics of JFETs. Analysis of MOS capacitor. Calculation of threshold voltage. Static I-V characteristics of MOSFETs and their models. Text Books : 1. B.G. Streetman and S. Banerjee, Solid State Electronic Devices, Prentice Hall, New Jersey.2. S.M. Sze, Semiconductor Devices Physics and Technology, John Wiley and Sons, New York.3. D. A. Neamen, Semiconductor Physics and Devices, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd., New Delhi.4. K.N. Bhat and M.K. Achuthan, Fundamentals of Semiconductor Devices, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd., New Delhi.5. N. DasGupta and A. DasGupta, Semiconductor Devices Modelling and Technology, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi. Reference Books : 1. A.S. Grove, Physics and Technology of Semiconductor Devices, Wiley, New York.2. S.M. Sze, Physics of Semiconductor Devices, Wiley, New York.3. M.S. Tyagi, Introduction to Semiconductor Materials and Devices, John Wiley and Sons, New York. | 12 | 4 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 4 - 12 |

93 | EE5320 | Analog IC Design Course No : EE5320Course Title : Analog IC DesignPre Requisite : Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 8Total Hours PerWeek : 12Description : To teach students advanced concepts in analog circuit and IC design, and their analysis and simulation. Course Content : 1. Introduction to IC design and concepts 2. Noise and mismatch in analog design 3. Advanced concepts in Negative Feedback 4. One-stage opamps 5. Two-stage opamps, compensation 6. Fully differential opamps 7. Advanced topics in analog IC design such as PLLs, bandgap references Text Books : Design of Analog CMOS Integrated Circuits by Behzad Razavi; Tata McGraw-Hill, 2006 (ISBN: 0070529035) Reference Books : NIL | 12 | 4 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 8 - 12 |

94 | EE5320W | Analog IC Design Course No : EE5320WCourse Title : Analog IC DesignPre Requisite : Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 8Total Hours PerWeek : 12Description : To teach students advanced concepts in analog circuit and IC design, and their analysis and simulation. Course Content : 1. Introduction to IC design and concepts2. Noise and mismatch in analog design3. Advanced concepts in Negative Feedback4. One-stage opamps5. Two-stage opamps, compensation6. Fully differential opamps7. Advanced topics in analog IC design such as PLLs, bandgap references Text Books : Design of Analog CMOS Integrated Circuits by Behzad Razavi; Tata McGraw-Hill, 2006 (ISBN: 0070529035) Reference Books : NIL | 12 | 4 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 8 - 12 |

95 | EE5323 | Advanced Electrical Networks Course No : EE5323Course Title : Advanced Electrical NetworksPre Requisite : Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 8Total Hours PerWeek : 12Description : To teach students advanced concepts in electrical network analysis and simulation. Course Content : Introduction: Review of linear electrical networks. Two port treatment using the scattering matrix – the Vector Network Analyzer. Reciprocity, Duality and Interreciprocity, Bode Sensitivity. Advanced Frequency compensation techniques.Noise in linear time invariant networks.Linear time varying and linear periodically time varying (LPTV) system analysis. Periodic transfer functions, Periodic AC analysis. Noise in LPTV systems – discrete time , mixed continuous-time/discrete-time analog circuits and frequency translating circuits. Phase noise in oscillators.Weakly nonlinear networks and the Volterra Series formulation – applications to Filters and data converters. Text Books : None. Reference Books : Selected papers from the IEEE Trans. On Circuits and Systems, IEEE Trans. On Microwave Theory and Techniques, the IEEE Journal of Solid State Circuits and the Proceedings of the IEEE. | 12 | 4 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 8 - 12 |

96 | EE5325 | Power Management Integrated Circuits Course No : EE5325Course Title : Power Management Integrated CircuitsPre Requisite : Analog CircuitsExtended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 8Total Hours PerWeek : 0Description : To develop understanding of why power management circuits are needed in a VLSI system. What are different components of a power management system with focus on dc-dc converters. How to design a chip level dc-dc converter from a given system level specifications. By the end of this course, students should be able to understand the concept behind power management circuits and be able to design a dc-dc converter for a specific system using behavioral and circuit level simulators such as MATALB/Simulink and Cadence. Students should be able select various parameters such as switching frequency, inductor and capacitor values for best performance and efficiency. Course Content : Unit-1: Introduction to Power Management and Voltage Regulators Need of power management, power management applications, classification of power management, power delivery of a VLSI system, power conversion, discrete vs. integrated power management, types of voltage regulators (switching Vs linear regulators) and applications, converter’s performance parameters (voltage accuracy, power conversion efficiency, load regulation, line regulation, line and load transient response, settling time, voltage tracking), local Vs remote feedback, kelvin sensing, Point-of-Load (POL) regulators. Unit-2: Linear Regulators Low Drop-Out Regulator (LDO), Source and sink regulators, shunt regulator, pass transistor, error amplifier, small signal and stability analysis, compensation techniques, current limiting, power supply rejection ratio (PSRR), NMOS vs. PMOS regulator, current regulator. Unit-3: Switching DC-DC Converters and Control Techniques Types (Buck, boost, buck-boost), power FETs, choosing L and C, PWM modulation, leading, trailing and dual edge modulation, Losses in switching converters, output ripple, voltage Vs current mode control, CCM and DCM modes, small signal model of dc-dc converter, loop gain analysis of un-compensated dc-dc converter, type-I, type-II and type-III compensation, compensation of a voltage mode dc-dc converter, compensation of a current mode dc-dc converter, hysteretic control, switched capacitor dc-dc converters. Unit-4:Top-down Design Approach of a DC-DC Converter Selecting topology, selecting switching frequency and external components, sizing power FETs, segmented power FET, designing gate driver, PWM modulator, error amplifier, oscillator, ramp generator, feedback resistors, current sensing, PFM/PSM mode for light load, effect of parasitic on reliability and performance, current limit and short circuit protection, soft start control, chip level layout and placement guidelines, board level layout guidelines, EMI considerations. Unit-5: Introduction to Advanced Topics in Power Management Digitally controlled dc-dc converters, digitally controlled LDOs, adaptive compensation, dynamic voltage scaling (DVS), Single-Inductor Multiple-Outputs (SIMO) Converters, dc-dc converters for LED lighting, Li-ion battery charging circuits. Text Books : Switch-Mode Power Supplies: SPICE Simulations and Practical Designs by Christophe P. Basso Indian Edition: Publisher: BPB Publications (1 December 2010) Language: English ISBN-10: 8183332919 ISBN-13: 978-8183332910 International Edition: Publisher: McGraw-Hill Professional, (1 February 2008) Language: English ISBN-10: 0071508589 ISBN-13: 978-0071508582 Reference Books : 1. Fundamentals of Power Electronics, 2nd edition by Robert W. Erickson, Dragan Maksimovic Indian Edition: Publisher: Springer (India) Pvt. Ltd. (2005) ISBN-10: 8181283635 ISBN-13: 978-8181283634 International Edition: Publisher: Springer; 2nd edition (January 2001) Language: English ISBN-10: 0792372700 ISBN-13: 978-0792372707 2. Power Management Techniques for Integrated Circuit Design By Ke-Horng Chen Publisher: Wiley-Blackwell (29 July 2016) ISBN-10: 1118896815 ISBN-13: 978-1118896815 | 12 | 4 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 8 - 0 |

97 | EE5325W | Power Management Integrated Circuits Course No : EE5325WCourse Title : Power Management Integrated CircuitsPre Requisite : Analog CircuitsExtended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 8Total Hours PerWeek : 0Description : To develop understanding of why power management circuits are needed in a VLSI system. What are different components of a power management system with focus on dc-dc converters. How to design a chip level dc-dc converter from a given system level specifications.By the end of this course, students should be able to understand the concept behind power management circuits and be able to design a dc-dc converter for a specific system using behavioral and circuit level simulators such as MATALB/Simulink and Cadence. Students should be able select various parameters such as switching frequency, inductor and capacitor values for best performance and efficiency. Course Content : Unit-1: Introduction to Power Management and Voltage RegulatorsNeed of power management, power management applications, classification of power management, power delivery of a VLSI system, power conversion, discrete vs. integrated power management, types of voltage regulators (switching Vs linear regulators) and applications, converter’s performance parameters (voltage accuracy, power conversion efficiency, load regulation, line regulation, line and load transient response, settling time, voltage tracking), local Vs remote feedback, kelvin sensing, Point-of-Load (POL) regulators.Unit-2: Linear RegulatorsLow Drop-Out Regulator (LDO), Source and sink regulators, shunt regulator, pass transistor, error amplifier, small signal and stability analysis, compensation techniques, current limiting, power supply rejection ratio (PSRR), NMOS vs. PMOS regulator, current regulator.Unit-3: Switching DC-DC Converters and Control TechniquesTypes (Buck, boost, buck-boost), power FETs, choosing L and C, PWM modulation, leading, trailing and dual edge modulation, Losses in switching converters, output ripple, voltage Vs current mode control, CCM and DCM modes, small signal model of dc-dc converter, loop gain analysis of un-compensated dc-dc converter, type-I, type-II and type-III compensation, compensation of a voltage mode dc-dc converter, compensation of a current mode dc-dc converter, hysteretic control, switched capacitor dc-dc converters.Unit-4:Top-down Design Approach of a DC-DC ConverterSelecting topology, selecting switching frequency and external components, sizing power FETs, segmented power FET, designing gate driver, PWM modulator, error amplifier, oscillator, ramp generator, feedback resistors, current sensing, PFM/PSM mode for light load, effect of parasitic on reliability and performance, current limit and short circuit protection, soft start control, chip level layout and placement guidelines, board level layout guidelines, EMI considerations.Unit-5: Introduction to Advanced Topics in Power ManagementDigitally controlled dc-dc converters, digitally controlled LDOs, adaptive compensation, dynamic voltage scaling (DVS), Single-Inductor Multiple-Outputs (SIMO) Converters, dc-dc converters for LED lighting, Li-ion battery charging circuits. Text Books : Switch-Mode Power Supplies: SPICE Simulations and Practical Designsby Christophe P. BassoIndian Edition:Publisher: BPB Publications (1 December 2010)Language: EnglishISBN-10: 8183332919ISBN-13: 978-8183332910International Edition:Publisher: McGraw-Hill Professional, (1 February 2008)Language: EnglishISBN-10: 0071508589ISBN-13: 978-0071508582 Reference Books : 1. Fundamentals of Power Electronics, 2nd editionby Robert W. Erickson, Dragan MaksimovicIndian Edition:Publisher: Springer (India) Pvt. Ltd. (2005)ISBN-10: 8181283635ISBN-13: 978-8181283634International Edition:Publisher: Springer; 2nd edition (January 2001)Language: EnglishISBN-10: 0792372700ISBN-13: 978-0792372707 2. Power Management Techniques for Integrated Circuit DesignBy Ke-Horng ChenPublisher: Wiley-Blackwell (29 July 2016)ISBN-10: 1118896815ISBN-13: 978-1118896815 | 12 | 4 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 8 - 0 |

98 | EE5332 | Mapping Signal Processing Algorithms to DSP Architectures Course No : EE5332Course Title : Mapping Signal Processing Algorithms to DSP ArchitecturesPre Requisite : UG DSP required, Digital IC design recommendedExtended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 8Total Hours PerWeek : 0Description : To understand properties of digital signal processing algorithms that are relevant to their hardware implementation, and use these insights to design appropriate hardware/software architectures for such systems. Course Content : Course topics: - Architectures for VLSI implementation of signal processing systems - Multi-core, many-core, hardware accelerators - Metrics for analysis and comparison of architectures - DSP algorithms, properties relevant to hardware realizations - Modifications to algorithms to improve hardware realizability - Models such as dataflow graphs and their use in architecture exploration - Communication architectures, networks on chip - Specialized architectures for DSP functions The course also has a lab component that could include C/C++ coding, Verilog etc., but is not intended to teach these languages in detail. Text Books : K. K. Parhi, VLSI Digital Signal Processing, Wiley 1999 Reference Books : DSP Integrated Circuits, L. Wanhammar; papers and online reference material. | 12 | 4 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 8 - 0 |

99 | EE5332W | Mapping Signal Processing Algorithms to DSP Architectures Course No : EE5332WCourse Title : Mapping Signal Processing Algorithms to DSP ArchitecturesPre Requisite : UG DSP required, Digital IC design recommendedExtended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 8Total Hours PerWeek : 0Description : To understand properties of digital signal processing algorithms that are relevant to their hardware implementation, and use these insights to design appropriate hardware/software architectures for such systems. Course Content : Course topics: - Architectures for VLSI implementation of signal processing systems - Multi-core, many-core, hardware accelerators - Metrics for analysis and comparison of architectures - DSP algorithms, properties relevant to hardware realizations - Modifications to algorithms to improve hardware realizability - Models such as dataflow graphs and their use in architecture exploration - Communication architectures, networks on chip - Specialized architectures for DSP functions The course also has a lab component that could include C/C++ coding, Verilog etc., but is not intended to teach these languages in detail. Text Books : K. K. Parhi, VLSI Digital Signal Processing, Wiley 1999 Reference Books : DSP Integrated Circuits, L. Wanhammar; papers and online reference material. | 12 | 4 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 8 - 0 |

100 | EE5340 | Micro Electro Mechanical Systems Course No : EE5340Course Title : Micro Electro Mechanical SystemsPre Requisite : COTExtended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 6Total Hours PerWeek : 9Description : To study the design, fabrication and functioning of Micro Electro Mechanical Systems Course Content : Introduction to MEMS Surface micromachining, Oxide anchored Cantilever beam, poly anchored beams LPCVD poly silicon deposition, doping, oxidation Transport in PolySi, 2 and 3 terminal beams Bulk micromachining; Wet etching –isotropic and anisotropic; Etch stop – Electrochemical etching; Dry etching; Bonding Comparison of bulk and Surface micromachining: LIGA; SU-8; Moulding processes; Stiction: process, in-use, Measuring stiction Pull-in parallel plate capacitor Pressure Sensor: piezo-resisitivity, Diffused Si, Poly, porous Si Beams: Structure; force, moments, equation, spring constant; Stress, pull-in, pull-out; resonance freq, etc Accelerometer. Quasi-static, capacitive, equivalent circuit; Analog; Tunnel; Thermal accelerometer Rate Gyroscope Biosensor and BioMEMS; Microfluidics; Digital Microfluidics; Ink jet printer Optical MEMS: Displays -DMDs, LGVs, active and passive components RF MEMS: switches, active and passive components Packaging; Reliability Scaling Other materials/ actuators By TAs MEMS software training: COMSOL & Intellisuite Some process technology (Litho, oxidation, etc) Text Books : Microsystems design, Senturia Reference Books : Microfabrication, Madou Polycrystalline Si, Ted Kamins | 9 | 3 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 6 - 9 |

101 | EE5341 | MOS Device Modeling & Characterization Course No : EE5341Course Title : MOS Device Modeling & CharacterizationPre Requisite : COT for BTech studentsExtended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 6Total Hours PerWeek : 9Description : To provide the students a good understanding of the operation, modelling and characterization of MOS devices Course Content : MOS capacitor: C-V characteristics; Effect of metal work function, oxide and interface trapped charges. Threshold voltage. Tunnelling current. MOSFET: Threshold based models of static I-V characteristics: Channel length modulation, field dependent mobility, short channel and narrow width effects; Subthreshold current. Quantum mechanical effects Capacitances, concept of non-reciprocal capacitances. Dynamic behaviour under small and large signals. Surface potential and charge based models. Model parameters and their extraction. SOI MOSFETs, Double Gate MOSFETs and FinFETs. Text Books : 1. Streetman and Banerjee, “Solid State Electronic Devices”, Prentice-Hall 2. Y. Taur and T.H. Ning, “Fundamentals of Modern VLSI Devices”, Wiley 3. M.S.Tyagi, “Introduction to Semiconductor Materials and Devices’, Wiley India Pvt.Ltd. 4. N. DasGupta and A. DasGupta, “Semiconductor Devices Modelling and Technology”, PHI Learning Pvt.Ltd. Reference Books : 1. A. B. Bhattacharya, " Compact MOSFET Models for VLSI Design", John Wiley & Sons. 2. Y. Tsividis and C. McAndrew “Operation and Modelling of the MOS Transistor”, Oxford Series in Electrical and Computer Engineering 3. N. Arora, "MOSFET Models for VLSI Circuit Simulation", Springer 4. E. H. Nicollian and J. R. Brews, "MOS (Metal Oxide Semiconductor) Physics and Technology", John Wiley & Sons | 9 | 3 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 6 - 9 |

102 | EE5342 | Compound Semiconductors - Properties and Applications Course No : EE5342Course Title : Compound Semiconductors - Properties and ApplicationsPre Requisite : EE5313 (Semiconductor Device Modelling) for EE M.Tech, MS and Ph.D; EE 3001 (Solid State Devices) for EE B.Tech/DD and EE3301 (Introduction to Semiconductor Devices) for non-EE B.Tech/DD studentsExtended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 6Total Hours PerWeek : 9Description : To discuss and understand the merits and challenges of compound semiconductor based electronic and optoelectronic devices Course Content : Properties of most widely used compound semiconductors e.g. GaAs, InP, GaN and comparison with silicon. Technology of Compound Semiconductor devices with emphasis on crystal growth, MOCVD, MBE, Ion-implantation, etching and metallization. Problems of MOS devices on GaAs and InP MESFET Heterojunction devices e.g. HEMT and HBT on different material systems Optoelectronic devices e.g. solar cells, photodetectors, LEDs and LASERs on compound semiconductor platforms Text Books : VLSI Fabrication Principles by S.K.Ghandhi, Wiley 2008 High-Speed Semiconductor Devices ed S.M.Sze, Wiley 1990 Physics of Semiconductor Devices by Michael Shur, PHI, 1995 Optoelectronics and Photonics by S.O. Kasap, Pearson, 2009 Reference Books : Nitride Semiconductor Devices ed J.Piprek, Wiley-VCH, 2009 | 9 | 3 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 6 - 9 |

103 | EE5343 | Solar Cell Device Physics and Materials Technology Course No : EE5343Course Title : Solar Cell Device Physics and Materials TechnologyPre Requisite : Basics of semiconductor devices Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 6Total Hours PerWeek : 9Description : To understand the design and technology of solar cells/photovoltaic devices. Course Content : Motivation (Energy), Limits (Efficiency), Electrical conductivity, Optical properties of semiconductors, Recombination dynamics, Transport equation, Application of transport equations, Photocurrent in p-n junctions, Solar cell configurations, Efficiencies (solar cell parameters) and spectral response, Losses in solar cells, Equivalent circuits, Measurement techniques Crystalline Si solar cells, Heterojunctions-interfaces and cells, GaAs/AlGaAs solar cells, InP/CdS solar cells, Polycrystalline solar cells, Growth and fabrication techniques, 3rd generation solar cells-technology, ideas, designs Balance of Systems (Inverters), Lab Visit and hands on experience (CEC) Text Books : 1. Fundamentals of solar cells: A. L. Fahrenbruch and R. H. Bube. (Textbook) 2. Physics of semiconductor devices (2nd Ed.): S. M. Sze. Reference Books : 1. Semiconductor physics and devices, D. A. Neamen. 2. Review papers and other referred materials will be distributed in class. | 9 | 3 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 6 - 9 |

104 | EE5346 | Introduction to Plastic Electronics Course No : EE5346Course Title : Introduction to Plastic ElectronicsPre Requisite : Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 6Total Hours PerWeek : 9Description : To give an exposure to the basics of Plastic Electronics, a topical field of study, involving electronic and optoelectronic devices those are compatible to the flexible substrates, enabling inexpensive processing techniques, mechanically flexible and less power consumption. Course Content : (1) Historical Background; Objectives and scopes; Basics of organic semiconductors (2) Localized Charge Transport; Concept of Polaron (3) Organic Electronic Devices: Diodes (4) Organic Field-Effect Transistors: Charge transport (5) Optoelectronic properties of Organic Semiconductors (6) Organic LED; Organic Light Emitting Transistors; Phosphorescent LED (7) Organic Solar Cells (8) Organic Photo-FET: Charge generation, recombination and transport (9) Organic TFT Chemical sensors (10) Brief introduction to frontier area of oxide semiconductors and graphene as the potential materials for plastic electronics Text Books : See the Reference Books Reference Books : 1. S.-S. Sun, L. R. Dalton, “Introduction to Organic Electronic and Optoelectronic Materials and Devices”, (Editor), CRC Press, 2008. 2. F. So, “Organic Electronics: Materials, Processing, Devices and Applications”, CRC Press, 2009. 3. I. Kymissis, “Organic Field Effect Transistors: Theory, Fabrication and Characterization (Integrated Circuits and Systems)”, Springer, 2009. 4. K. Müllen, U. Scherf, “Organic Light Emitting Devices: Synthesis, Properties and Applications”, John Wiley & Sons, 2006. 5. S.-S. Sun, N. S. Sariciftci, “Organic photovoltaics: mechanism, materials, and devices,” Taylor & Francis, 2005. 6. S. M. Sze, "Physics of Semiconductor Devices", John Wiley and Sons. 7. Literature: Journal and Conference papers, Articles, Review | 9 | 3 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 6 - 9 |

105 | EE5347 | Quantum Photonics Devices and Technology Course No : EE5347Course Title : Quantum Photonics Devices and TechnologyPre Requisite : Basics of Electromagnetics and LightwavesExtended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 8Total Hours PerWeek : 12Description : Lightwave technology and Photonics played an important role in the progress and recent success in quantum science and technology. The primary objective of this course is to introduce the quantum aspects of lightwaves (photons) and practical devices for various quantum photonics applications. Students also will get to learn state-of-art technologies for integrated quantum photonic functions. Course Content : Wave Mechanics and Quantum States of Light: Wave Function, Eigen States and Superposition, Concept of Quantum Bit (Qubit), Cavity Quantum Harmonic Oscillator, Photon Statistics, Coherent States and Squeezed Light, Photon Number States Practical Devices for Quantum Photonic Functions: Generation of Entangled Photon Pairs and Heralded Single Photons, Beam Splitter/Filters, Mach-Zehnder Interferometer, Delay Line and Phase-Shifter, Photon Detection/Counters Integrated Quantum Photonics: Technology and Platforms, Quantum Random Number Generator (QRNG), On-chip Quantum Key Distribution (QKD), Linear Optical Quantum Computing (LOQC) with Photonic Qubit Text Books : 1. Quantum Optics by Mark Fox, Oxford University Press (2006) Reference Books : 1. Quantum Photonics: Pioneering Advances and Emerging Applications by Boyd, Lukishova and Zadkov, Springer (2019). 2. Applied Quantum Mechanics by AFJ Levi, Cambridge University Press (2006) | 12 | 4 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 8 - 12 |

106 | EE5351 | Linear Algebra Techniques for data analysis and modelling Course No : EE5351Course Title : Linear Algebra Techniques for data analysis and modellingPre Requisite : Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 6Total Hours PerWeek : 9Description : 1. Linear algebra tools required for data analysis and dimensionality reduction 2. Reduced order modelling: Subspace projection methods for efficient analysis of dynamical systems, in particular for circuit simulation. Course Content : Vector spaces, spaces associated with a matrix, linear transformations, similarity transformations. Solution of linear system of equations, LU and QR decomposition, orthogonal and oblique projections, pseudo-inverse, singular value decomposition. Applications to data analysis: Regression, Principal component analysis, factor analysis, linear discriminant analysis, compressed sensing. Application to modelling: System identification, dimensionality reduction of a system of differential equations, Krylov subspace techniques, data-driven modelling. Text Books : 1. A.C.Antoulas, Approximation of large-scale dynamical systems, SIAM 2. Dan A. Simovici, Linear Algebra tools for data mining, World Scientific 3. Nathan Kutz, Data driven modelling and scientific computation, Oxford Universit press. 4. G.Strang, Linear Algebra and its applications. Reference Books : None | 9 | 3 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 6 - 9 |

107 | EE5400 | Analog and Digital Circuits Course No : EE5400Course Title : Analog and Digital CircuitsPre Requisite : Analog Systems & Lab (This is required for the B. Tech/DD students)Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 7Total Hours PerWeek : 0Description : On completion of this course, students will be able to (a) analyze simple as well as complex Analog and digital circuits, (b) quantify the performance of a given circuit or digital system using appropriate tools (c) design and implement analog and digital systems or combination of it. Course Content : Ideal opamp : Linear circuits: basic circuits like integrator, practical integrator, buffer, inverting, non-inverting, differential and instrumentation amplifiers, current sources floating and grounded loads, negative impedance converter, generalized impedance converter. Real opamp Performance parameters: Static limitations, Dynamic limitations, Input-output swing limitations, compensation techniques. Closed-loop stability: Feedback stability issues and frequency compensation methods. Noise in opamps. Switched-capacitor circuits. Applications: Non-linear circuits-Comparators, Schmitt trigger, precision rectifier. Non-linear amplifiers: log/antilog amplifiers, analog multipliers Analog-digital converters Protection circuits for opamps, input and output over voltage and current protection, supply bypassing, avoiding faulty conditions, interference, noise, shielding and guarding, dc leakage paths, Earth loops. Digital: NMOS and CMOS inverters, Digital-overview, timing analysis, static and dynamic hazards, Latches, racing, master salve flip-flops, characteristic equations, sequential circuits, Synchronous state machine analysis, Moore and Mealy machines, state table, state diagram, design of synchronous state machines. Laboratory experiments: . Negative Feedback Amplifiers and Instrumentation Amplifiers 2. Regenerative/Positive Feedback systems: Schmitt Trigger, Astable, and Monostable Multi-vibrator. 3. Design, implementation and testing of analog active second order low pass, high pass, band pass and band reject filters. 4. Design, implementation and testing of multiple feedback band pass filter, Twin-T type notch filter and all-pass filter. 5. Signal Conditioning Circuit for Resistive Transducers. 6. Voltage Controlled Pulse-Width Modulation. 7. Introduction to Texas Instruments Launch pad Development Board and Code Composer Studio 4.2 IDE for Embedded C programming. 8. Understand the operation of Analog-to-Digital Converters and Timers modules in microcontrollers and use these in some suitable applications. Text Books : 1. Sergio Franco, ‘Design with operational amplifiers and analog integrated circuits’. 2. George Clayton and Steve Winder, Operational Amplifiers’ 3. Wakerly, John F. Digital design. Vol. 3. Prentice Hall, 2000. Reference Books : (a) Sedra and Smith, ‘Microelectronic circuits’. (b) Donald A Neamen, ‘Electronic circuit analysis and design’. (c) Ramon Pallas Areny, ‘Analog signal processing’. | 12 | 2 - 0 - 3 - 0 - 7 - 0 |

108 | EE5410 | Introduction to DSP Course No : EE5410Course Title : Introduction to DSPPre Requisite : EE1101 Signals and Systems or equivalentExtended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 8Total Hours PerWeek : 12Description : To introduce the fundamentals of Digital Signal Processing Course Content : Discrete-Time Signals and Systems: Basic discrete time signals (unit impulse, unit step, etc.)—complex exponentials and differences between their continuous-time counterparts—scaling of the independent axis—system properties (linearity, time-invariance, memory, causality, BIBO stability)—LTI systems described by linear constant coefficient difference equations (LCCDE). Discrete-Time Fourier Transform (DTFT): Complex exponentials as eigensignals of LTI systems—DTFT definition—inversion formula—properties—relationship to continuous-time Fourier series (CTFS). Z-Transform: Generalized complex exponentials as eigensignals of LTI systems—z-transform definition—region of convergence (RoC)—properties of RoC—properties of the z-transform—inverse z-transform methods (partial fraction expansion, power series method, contour integral approach)—pole-zero plots—time-domain responses of simple pole-zero plots—RoC implications of causality and stability. Frequency Domain Analysis of LTI Systems: Frequency response of systems with rational transfer function—definitions of magnitude and phase response—geometric method of frequency response evaluation from pole-zero plot—frequency response of single complex zero/pole—frequency response of simple configurations (second order resonator, notch filter, averaging filter, comb filter, allpass systems)—phase response—definition of principal phase—zero-phase response—group delay—phase response of single complex zero/pole—extension to higher order systems—effect of a unit circle zero on the phase response—zero-phase response representation of systems with rational transfer function—minimum phase and allpass systems—constant group delay and its consequences—generalized linear phase—conditions that have to be met for a filter to have generalized linear phase—four types of linear phase FIR filters—on the zero locations of a linear phase FIR filter—constrained zeros at z = 1 and at z = -1 and their implications on choice of filters Type I through Type IV when designing filters—frequency response expressions for Type I through Type IV filters. Sampling: Impulse train sampling—relationship between impulse trained sampled continuous-time signal spectrum and the DTFT of its discrete-time counterpart—scaling of the frequency axis—relationship between true frequency and digital frequency—reconstruction through sinc interpolation—aliasing—effects of oversampling—discrete-time processing of continuous-time signals. Introduction to the DFT—FFT: Decimation in Time (DIT) algorithm. Text Books : Discrete-Time Signal Processing by Alan V. Oppenheim and Ronald W. Schafer, 3rd edition, 2010, Prentice Hall, Upper Saddle River, NJ. Reference Books : (1) Digital Signal Processing by John G. Proakis and Dimitris K. Manolakis, 4th edition, 2007, Prentice Hall, Upper Saddle River, NJ. (2) Digital Signal Processing by Sanjit Mitra, 4th edition, 2011, McGraw-Hill, New York, NY. (3) Essentials of Digital Signal Processing by B.P. Lathi and R.A. Green, 2014, Cambridge University Press, New York, NY. | 12 | 3 - 1 - 0 - 0 - 8 - 12 |

109 | EE5412 | Mathematical Methods in System Engineering Course No : EE5412Course Title : Mathematical Methods in System EngineeringPre Requisite : Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 8Total Hours PerWeek : 12Description : To introduce the mathematical prerequisites needed for graduate level courses offered in Control Engineering. Course Content : 1. Introduction to vector spaces: Systems of linear equations, Subspaces and bases, Orthogonal bases and orthogonal projections, Gram-Schmidt process, Linear models and least-squares problems, Eigenvalues and Eigenvectors, Symmetric and positive definite matrices. 2. Functions on Euclidean space: Subsets of Euclidean space, Norms and inner product, Functions and continuity, Sequences and convergence. 3. Calculus on Manifolds: Existence and uniqueness of solutions of ODEs, Derivatives, partial derivatives, Inverse and Implicit function theorem, Introduction to Manifolds, tangent bundle, vector fields, Lie brackets, distributions and Frobenius theorem. Text Books : . Reference Books : 1. Mathematical Analysis by Tom M. Apostol, Narosa Publishing House, 1993. 2. Calculus on Manifolds by Michael Spivak, W. A. Benjamin, Inc., 1965. 3. Finite-dimensional Vector Spaces by Paul R. Halmos, D Van Nostrand Company, Inc., 1942. | 12 | 4 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 8 - 12 |

110 | EE5413 | Linear Dynamical Systems Course No : EE5413Course Title : Linear Dynamical SystemsPre Requisite : Control Engineering or equivalentExtended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 8Total Hours PerWeek : 0Description : The aim of this course is to introduce state-space techniques for analysis of linear system models. This course forms the prerequisite for all advanced control courses. Course Content : 1. Models of physical and biological systems-- simple pendulum, segway scooter, consensu protocols for sensor networks, gene regulatory networks2. Equilibrium/operating points, Jacobian linearization3. Relative degree, diffeomorphism, input/output linearization of nonlinear systems4. Minimal realization, Smith-McMillan form5. Continuous-time linear time-varying/time-invariant (LTV/LTI) state-space models, Peono-Baker series, matrix exponentials, similarity transformations, Jordan normal form, algebriac and geometric multiplicity, minimal polynomial6. Reachable and controllable subspaces, Controllability and observability Gramians, Kalman and Popov-Belevitch-Hautus (PBH) test for controllability and observability, Controllable and observable canonical forms7. Stabilizability and detectability, Kalman canonical decomposition, Review of matrix theory--matrix norms, positive/negative definiteness8. Lyapunov stability, Lyapunov equation, Eigenvalue conditions for Lyapunov stability, Separation principle, pole-placement and observer design9. Linear optimal control techniques, Linear quadratic regulator (LQR), the algebraic Riccati equation. Text Books : 1. Joao P. Hespanha, '' Linear Systems Theory", Princeton University Press, 2009, New Jersey Reference Books : 1. C. T. Chen,'' Linear System Theory and Design" ,Third Edition, Oxford University Press.2. Panos J. Antsaklis and Anthony N. Michel, "Linear Systems", Birkhauser, 1997, New York.3. R. W. Brockett, "Finite Dimensional Linear Systems", John Wiley and Sons, 1970, New York. | 12 | 4 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 8 - 0 |

111 | EE5500 | Introduction to Photonics Course No : EE5500Course Title : Introduction to PhotonicsPre Requisite : Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 6Total Hours PerWeek : 9Description : To provide a description of the fundamental principles of photonics and light-matter interactions. The students would be able to explain the wave, particle and statistical nature of light, describe amplitude, phase, polarisation and orbital angular momentum of light, generation and detection of light, different light matter interaction processes such as absorption, amplification, interaction between RF and light Course Content : Wave/particle duality, Diffraction of Light, Statistical properties of light, Coherence, Photon properties - energy, flux, statistics, Interaction of photons with matter, Light amplification, Semiconductor light sources and detectors, Laser Fundamentals, Junction devices, Manipulation of photons : Interaction with RF and acoustic waves, fundamentals of nonlinear optics. Text Books : Saleh & Teich, "Fundamentals of Photonics", Wiley Interscience, Second edition "Fundamentals of Photonics", SPIE Publications Reference Books : Ben Streetman, "Solid State Electronic Devices", Prentice Hall, Sixth editionYariv & Yeh, "Photonics", Oxford Press, Sixth editionEugene Hect, "Optics", Addison Wesley, Second edition | 9 | 3 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 6 - 9 |

112 | EE5501 | Photonics Laboratory Course No : EE5501Course Title : Photonics LaboratoryPre Requisite : Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 0Total Hours PerWeek : 3Description : To provide hands on learning experience to understand the fundamental principles of optics and photonics. At the end of the course, the students would be able to understand the properties of light, generation and detection of light and light matter interactions. Course Content : The laboratory will comprise of experiments on sources (LEDs, lasers) and detectors, phenomena such as interference and diffraction, properties such as polarisation and phase, light matter interaction such as absorption, amplification, Faraday effect and optical rotation. Text Books : Saleh and Teich, Fundamentals of Photonics, Wiley Reference Books : Online resources | 3 | 0 - 0 - 3 - 0 - 0 - 3 |

113 | EE5502 | Optical Engineering Course No : EE5502Course Title : Optical EngineeringPre Requisite : UG Electromagnetics courseExtended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 7Total Hours PerWeek : 12Description : Optics is used in many applications today. Opto-electronics and metrology are already well-developed fields merging the areas of optics and electronics in many advanced and commonly used devices. For an electrical engineering student to be able to understand and design optics or electronics for such applications, it is important to understand some basic optics. This course will introduce these concepts at a level relevant for an engineer. The course will also study specific engineering examples. Course Content : 1. Basic Optics Geometric Optics Gaussian Optics Fourier Optics 2. Interferometry Diffractive Optics and holography Advanced topics in optical engineering 3. Opto-electronic applications with details of working. Barcode readers Finger print sensors Pick-up heads used in DVD/CD players Biomedical instrumentation Interferometers for metrology Sensors Holographic data storage 4. Lab Content Optical System Design using OSLO® Experiments with interferometry, diffractive optics, CD pick-ups Text Books : Optics by A. Ghatak Modern Optical Engineering by W. Smith Optics for Engineers by C.A. DiMarzio Reference Books : Fundamentals of Photonics by Saleh and Teich, John Wiley and Sons Inc., 1991 | 12 | 2 - 0 - 3 - 0 - 7 - 12 |

114 | EE5504 | Fiber Optic Communication Technology Course No : EE5504Course Title : Fiber Optic Communication TechnologyPre Requisite : Undergraduate-level course in electro-magnetics or opticsExtended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 8Total Hours PerWeek : 12Description : Understand the fundamental principles of fiber optic communications Develop the ability to design fiber optic communication links according to specific requirements Course Content : I. Single Hop Optical Communication Links Motivation for optical communication links Optical fiber characteristics – concept of modes, origin of attenuation/dispersion Semiconductor light sources and detectors – double hetero-structures, LI and modulation characteristics, responsivity and bandwidth of PIN/APDs Noise in optical receivers – shot/thermal noise limitations, BER measurements Design of single-hop communication links - power/rise-time budget, power penalty External light modulators – modulation bandwidth, extinction ratio, modulation formats II. Multi-Hop Optical Communication Links Concept of Wavelength Division Multiplexing (WDM), WDM components Optical Amplifiers – Erbium Doped Fiber Amplifiers (EDFA), gain saturation, ASE noise, noise figure Design of WDM links – power/rise-time budget, power penalty Influence of nonlinearities in WDM links III. Optical Fiber Networks Introduction to Optical Networking Design of SDH networks Text Books : G.P. Agrawal, Fiber Optic Communication Systems, John Wiley, 2003 Reference Books : Gerd Keiser, Optical Fiber Communications, 3/e, McGraw Hill, 1999. Rajiv Ramaswamy, Kumar N. Sivarajan and Galen Sasaki, “Optical Networks - A Practical Perspective”, 3/e, Morgan and Kaufmann, 2008 | 12 | 4 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 8 - 12 |

115 | EE5505 | Wave Propagation in Communication Course No : EE5505Course Title : Wave Propagation in CommunicationPre Requisite : Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 6Total Hours PerWeek : 0Description : To give students the skill to tackle problems involving the wave equation in bounded and unbounded media Course Content : Review of Maxwells equations, Boundary Conditions Wave equation, Plane wave solution, Wave Characteristics, characteristic impedance Polarisation, EM spectrum, Poynting Theorem Wave propagation in unbounded media - dielectrics, conductors, skin effect, plasma Plane waves at media interface - normal incidence Plane waves at media interface -oblique incidence, Snells Law, TIR, Brewsters angle Multilayers, impedance matching Parallel plane waveguides -TEM, TE and TM modes, cut off frequencies Distributed impedance, microstrips Waveguides : rectangular waveguide, TE, TM, modes Attenuation in waveguides Dielectric slab waveguide, concept of a fibre Basics of radiation theory-retarded potentials, radiation from a linear dipole antenna Antenna Patterns and Antenna parameters, Antenna arrays Text Books : David Cheng, "Field and Wave Electromagnetics," 2nd Ed, Pearson (2014) NN Rao, "Elements of Engineering Electromagnetics," 6th Ed, Pearson (2007) Reference Books : Ramo, Whinnery and van Duzer, "Fields and Waves in Communication Electronics", 3rd Ed, Wiley Student Edition, Singapore (2004). | 9 | 3 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 6 - 0 |

116 | EE5505W | Wave Propagation in Communication Course No : EE5505WCourse Title : Wave Propagation in CommunicationPre Requisite : Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 6Total Hours PerWeek : 0Description : To give students the skill to tackle problems involving the wave equation in bounded and unbounded media Course Content : Review of Maxwells equations, Boundary ConditionsWave equation, Plane wave solution, Wave Characteristics, characteristic impedancePolarisation, EM spectrum, Poynting TheoremWave propagation in unbounded media - dielectrics, conductors, skin effect, plasmaPlane waves at media interface - normal incidencePlane waves at media interface -oblique incidence, Snells Law, TIR, Brewsters angleMultilayers, impedance matchingParallel plane waveguides -TEM, TE and TM modes, cut off frequenciesDistributed impedance, microstripsWaveguides : rectangular waveguide, TE, TM, modesAttenuation in waveguides Dielectric slab waveguide, concept of a fibreBasics of radiation theory-retarded potentials, radiation from a linear dipole antennaAntenna Patterns and Antenna parameters, Antenna arrays Text Books : David Cheng, "Field and Wave Electromagnetics," 2nd Ed, Pearson (2014)NN Rao, "Elements of Engineering Electromagnetics," 6th Ed, Pearson (2007) Reference Books : Ramo, Whinnery and van Duzer, "Fields and Waves in Communication Electronics", 3rd Ed, Wiley Student Edition, Singapore (2004). | 9 | 3 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 6 - 0 |

117 | EE5507 | RF Systems Laboratory Course No : EE5507Course Title : RF Systems LaboratoryPre Requisite : Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 0Total Hours PerWeek : 3Description : To introduce students to experiments with RF devices for radars, communication and imaging. At the end of this course, students would be able to understand the working of a Vector Network Analyser, measure the S parameters of some commonly used RF components, measure the radiation pattern of different types of antennas, demonstrate generation and detection of commonly used modulations, configure transmitters and receivers for mm wave communication, demonstrate sensing using mm waves and demonstrate the commonly used signal processing tasks in radar systems. Course Content : The laboratory will comprise of experiments that include characterisation of a microwave source, assembling a network analyzer, measurement of S-parameters of devices, microstrip and patch antenna fabrication and characterisation, radiation pattern measurement - single antenna and antenna arrays, modulation, detection and signal processing, THz imaging. Experiments will be supported with design and simulation exercises as applicable. Text Books : Michael Steer, Fundamentals of Microwave and RF Design, Third Edition, NC State University Press (Open Access) Reference Books : Application notes and other online resources | 3 | 0 - 0 - 3 - 0 - 0 - 3 |

118 | EE5520 | Introduction to Photonics Course No : EE5520Course Title : Introduction to PhotonicsPre Requisite : NoneExtended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 8Total Hours PerWeek : 12Description : To introduce the student to the area of photonics and equip him/her to take more advanced course in the subsequent semesters. Course Content : 1. Fundamentals - Ray optics, wave optics, electromagnetic optics, photon optics - Polarization optics - Nonlinear optical phenomena 2. Semiconductor Light Sources and Detectors - Interaction of photons with semiconductors - Light emitting diodes - Semiconductor lasers - PIN photodiodes - Avalanche photodiodes 3. Optical Modulators and Switches - Interference of light waves - Electro-optics - Acousto-optics - Magneto-optics 4. Applications of Photonics - Fiber Optic Communications - Optical Sensors - Optical Storage Text Books : 1. B E A Saleh and MC Teich, Fundamentals of Photonics, John Wiley & Sons 1991. 2. A Ghatak and K Thyagarajan, Introduction to Fiber Optics, Cambridge University Press 2006. Reference Books : ---------- | 12 | 4 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 8 - 12 |

119 | EE5703 | VLSI Design Laboratory Course No : EE5703Course Title : VLSI Design LaboratoryPre Requisite : Digital IC DesignExtended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 3Total Hours PerWeek : 6Description : To learn the steps in synthesis and hardware implementation of digital integrated circuits using a hardware description language, and to apply these in practice on FPGA boards. Course Content : - Hardware description languages with focus on Verilog - Use of Verilog HDL to implement FPGA based designs - Specific examples from signal processing implemented on FPGA boards - Use of virtual logic analyzers and virtual instrumentation for debugging Text Books : No specific book. Class notes and online material Reference Books : Verilog HDL: A guide to digital design and synthesis, S. Palnitkar, 2003 Verilog HDL Synthesis: A Practical Primer, J. Bhasker, 1997 Coding guidelines and software tutorials, Xilinx | 6 | 0 - 0 - 3 - 0 - 3 - 6 |

120 | EE6010 | Smart Power Grids Course No : EE6010Course Title : Smart Power GridsPre Requisite : EE 5122 Computer Methods in Power SysemsExtended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 6Total Hours PerWeek : 9Description : To teach the students the developments in the interdisciplinary area of smart power grids and the applications of new methodologies / technologies arising in the new domain. Course Content : I INTRODUCTION TO SMART GRID: Evolution of Smart Grid. Need and Benefits of Smart Grid. Divers for Smart grid, functions, opportunities and challenges. Difference between conventional and Smart Grid. Concept of Resilient & Self Healing Grid, Present development & International policies in Smart Grid. II SMART GRID TECHNOLOGIES: Smart Grid Technology Drivers, Renewable energy resources, Smart substations, Substation Automation, Feeder Automation ,Transmission systems: EMS, FACTS and HVDC, Wide area monitoring, Protection and control, Distribution systems: DMS, Volt/VAr control, Fault Detection, Isolation and service restoration, Outage management, High-Efficiency Distribution Transformers, Phase Shifting Transformers, Plug in Hybrid Electric Vehicles (PHEV). III SMART METERS AND ADVANCED METERING INFRASTRUCTURE: Introduction to Smart Meters, Advanced Metering infrastructure (AMI) drivers and benefits, AMI protocols and standards, AMI needs in the smart grid, Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU), Intelligent Electronic Devices(IED) & their applications. IV POWER QUALITY MANAGEMENT IN SMART GRID : Power Quality in Smart Grid, Power Quality issues of Grid connected Renewable Energy Sources, Power Quality Conditioners for Smart Grid, Web based Power Quality monitoring, Power Quality Audit. V SMART GRID COMMUNICATIONS: Local Area Network (LAN), House Area Network (HAN), Wide Area Network (WAN), Broadband over Power line (BPL), IP based Protocols, Wireless Sensor Networks (WSNs) Cyber Security for Smart Grid. VI DATA ANALYTICS IN SMART GRIDS: Data Analytics, Foundations, Big Data Management, Analytical Models in Utility, Predictive Analysis and Prescriptive Analysis, Operational Analytics. etc. Applications in Energy Forecasting, Demand response and Energy Analytics, case study in Hadoop and R. VII SMART GRID APPLICATIONS: Demand Side Management, Load Management, State Estimation, Energy Management and Conservation, Smart Grid Analytics, Data Mining and Clustering. Etc. Text Books : Ali Keyhani and Muhammad Marwali (Eds.) “Smart Power Grids 2011”, Springer, 2011. Reference Books : Nouredine Hadjsaïd, Jean-Claude Sabonnadière (Eds), “Smart Grids“, Wiley 2012 James Momoh, “SMART GRID Fundamentals of Design and Analysis”, IEEE Press, 2012. David Bakken and KrzysztofIniewskI (Eds) “SMART GRIDS Clouds, Communications, Open Source and Automation”, CRC Press 2014. 5. Ekram Hossain, Zhu Han and H. Vincent Poor, “Smart Grid Communications and Networking”, Cambridge University Press, Carol L Stimmel,“Big Data Analytics Strategies for the smart Grid”, CRC Press, 2015. | 9 | 3 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 6 - 9 |

121 | EE6011 | GIAN 151003D04: Integrated Circuits for High Speed Serial Links Course No : EE6011Course Title : GIAN 151003D04: Integrated Circuits for High Speed Serial LinksPre Requisite : Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 2Total Hours PerWeek : 3Description : * To introduce students to high speed circuit and system design for high speed data links. * Enable them to evaluate engineering tradeoffs involved in wireline communications, as applied to serial links. * Understand, appreciate and simulate PLLs and clock recovery schemes as applied to serial links. Course Content : Channel Modeling - Wire properties and transmission lines Loss, reflections, and crosstalk Link performance analysis Peak distortion analysis Statistical analysis Noise budgeting Line drivers Current-mode drivers Voltage-mode drivers Equalizers FIR and Continuous-time equalizers Decision feedback equalizers Phase locked loops (PLLs) Charge-pump PLLs Loop components Noise optimization Case study Clock and data recovery (CDR) Performance metrics Basic architecture Application-specific CDR architectures Frequency detectors Text Books : Course Notes from Prof.Pavan Hanumolu, University of Illinois, Urbana-Champaign Reference Books : Selected Papers from the IEEE Journal of Solid State Circuits | 3 | 0 - 0 - 1 - 0 - 2 - 3 |

122 | EE6013 | GIAN151003D03: Coherent Optical Communication Course No : EE6013Course Title : GIAN151003D03: Coherent Optical CommunicationPre Requisite : Extended Tutorial: Outside Class Hours : Total Hours PerWeek : Description : Optical communication is a dynamically evolving technology that requires continual update of knowledge base for both academia and industry; especially with the advent of coherent communication in the optical domain. This course is intended to cover the fundamental aspects of optical communication with advanced modulation formats - generation and detection, basic digital signal processing tools to recover the data, and optical networks in the context of advanced modulation formats. At the end of the course, the participant will be able to 1. Describe the basic building blocks of an optical coherent communication system 2. Identify the laser sources and detectors used for coherent communication systems 3. Explain the generation and detection of advanced modulation formats at the physical layer 4. Demonstrate basic digital signal processing to recover data encoded in advanced modulation formats 5. Analyse the working of an optical network in the context of advanced modulation formats 6. Design a optical communication link based on coherent receivers and advanced modulation formats Course Content : 1. Optical Communication- Physical Layer a. Introduction to optical communication b. Advanced modulation formats -generation c. Coherent detection d. Impairments in coherent communciation systems e. Noise in the detectors, quantum limit, BER analysis 2. Signal processing for advanced modulation formats a. Clock recovery and timing error correction b. Phase noise and freq offset compensation c. Dispersion compensation d. Polarisation demultiplexing and PMD compensation 3. Coherent techniques in Optical networks a. Introduction to optical networks – long haul, back bone, metro/access networks b. Wavelength division multiplexed systems c. Optical switching and routing d. Advanced modulation formats in optical networks –back bone and metro networks networks e. Advanced modulation formats in access networks - Passive optical networks f. Elastic 4. Current research systems (2 Lectures- Liam Barry) a. Optical OFDM systems b. Other research systems 5. Computer simulation modules a. Characterization of optical communication system b. Digital signal processing of advanced modulation formats Text Books : High Spectral Density Optical Communication Technologies –M. Nakazawa, K. Kikuchi, T. Miyazaki (Eds.), Springer Reference Books : 1. Optical Coherent Communication Systems and Networks by Cvijetic, Djordjevic, Artech House 2. High Spectral Density Optical Communication Technologies –M. Nakazawa, K. Kikuchi, T. Miyazaki (Eds.), Springer 3. Introduction to DWDM Technology; S. V. Kartalopoulos, SPIE Press, 1999. 4. Fiber Optic Communication Systems; 4th ed., G. P. Agrawal, Wiley-Blackwell, 2010. 5. Optically Amplified WDM Networks; John Zyskind & A. Srivastava, Academic Press, 2010. 6. Introduction to DWDM Technology; S. V. Kartalopoulos, SPIE Press, 1999. 7. Optical Fiber Telecommunications V1B: Systems and Networks; 5th ed. ,I. Kaminow et al, Academic Press, 2008. 8. Ramaswami and Sivarajan, “Optical Networks : a practical perspective” | 6 | 6 - - - - - |

123 | EE6021 | Introduction to Research Course No : EE6021Course Title : Introduction to ResearchPre Requisite : NILExtended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 6Total Hours PerWeek : 9Description : This course introduces the research scholars (in EE Department) the definition and scope of (electrical) engineering research, including the methodologies and professional ethics (inclusive of bonafide work, IP and credit sharing). An important aspect of this course addresses healthy practices (from psychological perspective) namely, the research management apart from the resulting stress management without compromising on personal quality time. Course Content : Part A Metaphysical Aspects of Engineering Research: Role of skill sets, aptitudes, intelligence (IQ), experience, memory retention capabilities on the performance of an engineering researcher apart from his/ her attitude, determination, ambition and hard work on the same. Psychological, ethical aspects of engineering research and human relationships in R&D, teaching institutes. Presentation skills oral & paper publications. Part B: Nature of Mathematics and Natural Sciences: Main components of mathematics, viz, logic, reasoning, quantification, conjectures, theorems, lemmas and their application to real world (engineering) problems through modeling. Attributes of natural sciences and scientific methodologies: Experimental methods (design of experiments), observation, measurements (& errors), inference, theory explaining the experimental facts (hypothesis) and consistency and empirical formulae. Subtle relationships between mathematics and science and engineering Part C: Issues in Practical Engineering R & D. Mathematical modelling, justification, data analysis, visualization techniques and safety in R & D labs. Part D: Research Program Phases & Management: Course work, identification of a research problem, literature survey, organization of research ideas, contribution, thesis, technical paper, monograph writing and elements of an engineering research proposal. Text Books : "Art of Scientific Investigation", W.I.B Beveridge, W. & W Norton & Company Inc, New York, 1957 Reference Books : 1. "Art of being a Scientist: A guide to Students & their Mentors", Roel Snieder & Ken Larner, Cambridge University Press, 2009 2. Krishnan Nallaperumal "Engineering Research Methodologies", 1st edition, 3. "On Being a Scientist, A guide to Responsible Conduct in Research, Committee on Science, Engineering and Public Policy", National Academic Press, 2009. 4. "Philosophy of Science: A Very Short Introduction", Samir Okash, Oxford University Press, 2002. 5. 5. Luis M. Camarinha-Matos, Web document, http://www.uninova.pt/cam/teaching/SRMT/SRMTunit1.pdf | 0 | 3 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 6 - 9 |

124 | EE6022 | Research Topics in Electrical Eng Course No : EE6022Course Title : Research Topics in Electrical EngPre Requisite : Familiarity with design of motorsExtended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 2Total Hours PerWeek : 0Description : A course on Permanent Magnet Motors for Electric Vehicles Traction. This course will be about Permanent Magnet Motors and their application in Electric Vehicles. It will teach, at the level of IIT graduate students, an understanding of the principles, analysis and design of Permanent Magnet Motors. At the end of the subject a student will have the capability of designing and constructing a suitable PM Motor for his chosen application. In addition to design, students will also learn how to estimate the dynamic parameters of PM Machines and understand what the implications of those parameters are on performance of systems incorporating those machines. Examples taken from current research include some set of: 1. Inner rotor PM Synchronous Motors such as the machines that are used for traction drive of an electric vehicle. Since we are attempting to use such machines in our research into 3 wheeler propulsion, we will spend a little effort at trying to figure out how to optimally control them. 2. If time permits, we might consider some other applications such as "white goods" like washing machines, refrigerators, air conditioners etc. We assume that the students are smart and self-motivated, require little hand-holding and know when to seek help. Heavy emphasis will be placed on the assignments, with a mix of problems from textbooks and others suggested by current research. There will alsobe two quizzes and a three-hour final exam. Completing the problem sets will be the most important way of learning the material. The problem sets will require some heavy lifting and one may want to have a program to help out. MATLAB® is recommended. Course Content : Topics covered include: Motor and controller types Permanent magnets and magnetic circuits Consideration of the basic machine types: BLDC, PMSM, SPM/IPM Defining and optimizing of back EMF, cogging torque, airgap flux, KT , KE Development and optimization of control system , stability, and response Text Books : J.R. Hendershot Jr. and TJE Miller, Design of Brushless Permanent Magnet Motors Oxford Magna Physics ISBN: 0-19-859389-9 Reference Books : Course Notes will be provided as the primary reference. There are also additional texts that might be of interest and used for future reference: | 3 | 1 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 2 - 0 |

125 | EE6110 | Adaptive Signal Processing Course No : EE6110Course Title : Adaptive Signal ProcessingPre Requisite : EE5110 or EE3110Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 8Total Hours PerWeek : 12Description : This is a graduate-level course on adaptive filters.The design and performance of adaptive filters are discussed. Two classes of algorithms -- stochastic gradient algorithms and least squares algorithms -- to adapt the coefficients of a linear filter are discussed in detail. Course Content : 1) Review of Estimation Theory --- Minimum Mean Squared Error (MMSE) estimation --- Linear MMSE estimation --- Sequential linear MMSE estimation --- Kalman filter 2) Stochastic Gradient Algorithms --- Least Mean Squares (LMS) Algorithm --- Mean-square performance --- Transient performance 3) Least Squares Algorithms --- Recursive Least Squares (RLS) algorithm --- Kalman filtering and RLS algorithm 4) Other topics from: --- Array Algorithms --- Lattice Filters --- Robust Filters --- Other performance criterion (other than MMSE and LS) Text Books : A. H. Sayed, Adaptive Filters, John Wiley & Sons, NJ, ISBN 978-0-470-25388-5, 2008 Reference Books : 1. S. Haykin, Adaptive Filter Theory, Fourth Edition, Pearson Education LPE, 2007. 2. Alexander D. Poularikas, Zayed M. Ramadan, Adaptive filtering primer with MATLAB, CRC Press, 2006. 3. B. Widrow and S.D. Stearns, Adaptive Signal Processing, Prentice Hall, Englewood Cliffs, NJ, 1985. | 12 | 4 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 8 - 12 |

126 | EE6112 | Topics in Random Processes and Concentrations Course No : EE6112Course Title : Topics in Random Processes and ConcentrationsPre Requisite : EE5110Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 8Total Hours PerWeek : 12Description : This is proposed as an advanced graduate course, dealing predominantly with martingale techniques and concentration of probability measures, along with a few allied topics of interest in probability theory. Martingale and measure concentration techniques are becoming increasingly popular is various active areas of research, such as machine learning, resource allocation, complex networks, information theory and coding theory. It is hoped that this course would equip the students with the requisite familiarity and conceptual grasp to tackle various contemporary analysis and proof techniques. Course Content : 1. A nuanced look at Conditional Expectations (4 classes)a. The Hilbert Space L2 - covariance as an inner productb. Conditioning on sigma-algebrasc. Kolmogorov’s Existence Theorem for conditional expectation d. Properties of Conditional Expectations – iterated expectations, MMSE estimator as a projection onto an L2 subspace2. Filtrations – sequence of sigma-algebras evolving in time (1 class)3. Random Walks (4 classes)a. Random walks, hitting times, and threshold crossing probabilities, Kingman bound for a G/G/1 queueb. Stopping times and Wald’s identity4. Martingales (6-8 classes)a. Definitions, basic propertiesb. Doob’s Optional Stopping Theorem for Martingalesc. Kolmogorov Submartingale Inequalityd. Martingale Convergence Theorems and applications (Polya urn, stochastic approximation, population extinction, polar codes etc.)5. Exchangeability and Zero-One Laws (3-4 classes)a. Exchangeable random variables, de Finetti’s theoremb. Zero-One Laws (Kolmogorov and Hewitt Savage) with applications6. Concentration of Measure and applications (12-15 classes)a. MGF methods (Chernoff-Hoeffding, Bernstein…)b. Martingale concentrations (Azuma-Hoeffding, Doob’s martingale method, median concentrations)c. Logarithmic Sobolev Inequality d. Talagrand’s Isoperimetric Inequality Text Books : 1.Probability with Martingales, David Williams, CUP 1991.2. Concentration-of-measure inequalities, Gábor Lugosi, http://www.econ.upf.edu/~lugosi/anu.pdf Reference Books : 1. Concentration Inequalities: A Nonasymptotic Theory of Independenceby Stéphane Boucheron, Gábor Lugosi, Pascal Massart, OUP 2013 | 12 | 3 - 1 - 0 - 0 - 8 - 12 |

127 | EE6131 | Digital Filter Design Course No : EE6131Course Title : Digital Filter DesignPre Requisite : EE5130, CoTExtended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 8Total Hours PerWeek : 12Description : To teach the fundamentals of digital filter design Course Content : IIR Filter Design: Review of classical analog filter design (Butterworth, Chebyshev, Elliptic)--design of digital filters based on continuous-time filters--mapping of differentials--impulse invariant transformation--modified impulse invariant transformation--bilinear transformation--matched z-transform technique--Padé approximation--Prony's method--Shank's method--spectral transformations for digital filters. FIR Filter Design: Review of conditions needed for precise linear phase--design techniques for linear phase FIR filters: (a) windowing method, (b) frequency sampling, (c) weighted Chebyshev approximation. Quantization Effects: Review of binary representation of numbers--truncation and rounding--coefficient quantization--roundoff noise--interaction of roundoff noise and dynamic range--scaling for parallel and cascade forms--limit-cycle oscillations--state-space structures--error spectrum shaping via feedback. Text Books : Digital Filters and Signal Processing by Leland B. Jackson, 3rd edition, 1996, Kluwer Academic, Boston, MA. Reference Books : (1) Theory and Application of Digital Signal Processing by Lawrence R. Rabiner and Bernard Gold, 1975, Prentice-Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi. (2) Digital Filters: Analysis, Design, and Applications by Andreas Antoniou, 2nd edition, 1993, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Co. Ltd., New Delhi. (3) Digital Signal Processing by Andreas Antoniou, 2006, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Co. Ltd., New Delhi. Digital Signal Processing by Sanjit K. Mitra, 3rd edition, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Co. Ltd., New Delhi. (4) Statistical Digital Signal Processing and Modeling by Monson H. Hayes, 2001, John Wiley & Sons, New York, NY. | 12 | 4 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 8 - 12 |

128 | EE6132 | Advanced Topics in Signal Processing Course No : EE6132Course Title : Advanced Topics in Signal ProcessingPre Requisite : NILExtended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 6Total Hours PerWeek : 0Description : To teach students recent research and technology advances in the area that are of current interest. Course Content : 1. Basic Neural Network: Perceptron; Multi-layer Perceptron; Back propagation; Stochastic gradient descent; Universal approximation theorem; Applications in imaging such as for denoising. 2. Autoencoders: Autoencoder; Denoising auto-encoder; Sparse auto-encoder; Variational autoencoder; Applications in imaging such as segnet and image generation. 3. Convolutional Neural Networks (CNN): CNN Architecture (Convolutional layer, Pooling layer, ReLu layer, fully connected layer, loss layer); Regularization methods such as dropout; Fine-tuning; Understanding and Visualizing CNN; Applications of CNN in imaging such as object/scene recognition. 4. Recurrent Neural Network (RNN): Basic RNN; Long Short Term Memory (LSTM); Applications in imaging such as activity recognition. 5. Deep Generative Models: Restricted Boltzmann machine; Deep Boltzmann machine; Recurrent Image Density Estimators (RIDE); PixelRNN and PixelCNN; Plug-and-Play generative networks. 6. Generative Adversarial Network (GAN): GAN; Deep Convolutional GAN; Conditional GAN; Applications. 7. Deep Learning for Image Processing and Computational Imaging Denoising; Deblurring; Super-resolution; Color Filter Array design. Text Books : 1. Deep Learning by Ian Goodfellow, Yoshua Bengio and Aaron Courville, MIT Press, 2016: http://www.deeplearningbook.org/. 2. Pattern Recognition and Machine Learning by C.M. Bishop. Reference Books : 1. Stanford CS231n: Convolutional Neural Networks for Visual Recognition, http://cs231n.stanford.edu/ 2. Neural Networks and Deep Learning by Michael Nielsen: http://neuralnetworksanddeeplearning.com/ 3. Online course on Neural Network by Hugo Larochelle: http://info.usherbrooke.ca/hlarochelle/neural_networks/content.html | 9 | 3 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 6 - 0 |

129 | EE6132W | Advanced Topics in Signal Processing Course No : EE6132WCourse Title : Advanced Topics in Signal ProcessingPre Requisite : NILExtended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 6Total Hours PerWeek : 0Description : To teach students recent research and technology advances in the area that are of current interest. Course Content : 1. Basic Neural Network: Perceptron; Multi-layer Perceptron; Back propagation; Stochastic gradient descent; Universal approximation theorem; Applications in imaging such as for denoising. 2. Autoencoders: Autoencoder; Denoising auto-encoder; Sparse auto-encoder; Variational autoencoder; Applications in imaging such as segnet and image generation. 3. Convolutional Neural Networks (CNN): CNN Architecture (Convolutional layer, Pooling layer, ReLu layer, fully connected layer, loss layer); Regularization methods such as dropout; Fine-tuning; Understanding and Visualizing CNN; Applications of CNN in imaging such as object/scene recognition. 4. Recurrent Neural Network (RNN): Basic RNN; Long Short Term Memory (LSTM); Applications in imaging such as activity recognition. 5. Deep Generative Models: Restricted Boltzmann machine; Deep Boltzmann machine; Recurrent Image Density Estimators (RIDE); PixelRNN and PixelCNN; Plug-and-Play generative networks. 6. Generative Adversarial Network (GAN): GAN; Deep Convolutional GAN; Conditional GAN; Applications. 7. Deep Learning for Image Processing and Computational Imaging Denoising; Deblurring; Super-resolution; Color Filter Array design. Text Books : 1. Deep Learning by Ian Goodfellow, Yoshua Bengio and Aaron Courville, MIT Press, 2016: http://www.deeplearningbook.org/. 2. Pattern Recognition and Machine Learning by C.M. Bishop. Reference Books : 1. Stanford CS231n: Convolutional Neural Networks for Visual Recognition, http://cs231n.stanford.edu/ 2. Neural Networks and Deep Learning by Michael Nielsen: http://neuralnetworksanddeeplearning.com/ 3. Online course on Neural Network by Hugo Larochelle: http://info.usherbrooke.ca/hlarochelle/neural_networks/content.html | 9 | 3 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 6 - 0 |

130 | EE6133 | Multirate Digital Signal Processing Course No : EE6133Course Title : Multirate Digital Signal Processing Pre Requisite : EE5130 Digital Signal Processing or equivalentExtended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 6Total Hours PerWeek : 9Description : • Strengthen basic DSP concepts in sampling, reconstruction, and sampling rate change • A good understanding of the following concepts o Multirate DSP blocks, Upsampling, interpolation, decimation, Polyphase decomposition o Filterbanks – Analysis, synthesis, Perfect Reconstruction Filterbanks, Transmultiplexer, OFDM o Applications of multirate DSP (such as Delta-Sigma A/D), Wavelets and multirate Filterbanks Course Content : 1. INTRODUCTION • Sampling, Nyquist criterion, Aliasing, Reconstruction. LTI. DT Fourier Transform, Z Transform 2. MULTIRATE CONCEPTS • Multi-rate building blocks – up-sampling, interpolation, down-sampling (decimation), properties • Sampling rate conversion, Multirate filters, Polyphase implementation with Up/Down sampling 3. MULTI-RATE FILTER BANKS • Sub-band coding, Analysis and Synthesis filterbanks • Maximally decimated filterbanks – Aliasing cancellation, magnitude distortion, phase distortion • Filter Banks satisfying Perfect Reconstruction (PR) condition o Two channel PR filterbank, and M-channel filter PR filterbank 4. MULTIRATE FRAMEWORK FOR OFDM AND MULTICARRIER TRANSMISSION • AWGN Channel Capacity (Shannon), Frequency-selective fading channel Capacity, Water-filling • Motivation for OFDM, Filterbank transceivers, • Inter-Symbol Interference (ISI), Inter-Block Interference (IBI) – Zero-padding, Cyclic Prefix (CP) • An enhancement of OFDM - Filterbank Multicarrier (FBMC) 5. APPLICATIONS OF MULTIRATE DSP • Oversampled Delta-Sigma A/D, noise shaping, Interpolated FIR (IFIR) Filters, Multistage CIC filters 6. WAVELETS • Introduction, Short-Time Fourier Transform (STFT) • The Wavelet Transform and its Relation to Multirate Filter Banks 7. MATLAB EXERCISES & MINI PROJECT: Involving multirate DSP concepts Text Books : 1. P. P. Vaidyanathan, “Multirate Systems and Filter Banks,” Pearson, 2004, ISBN 81-297-0685-7 2. Discrete-Time Signal Processing by Alan V. Oppenheim, Ronald W. Schafer, 3rd edition, 2016, Pearson, ISBN 978-93-325-3503-9 Reference Books : 1. Frederic Harris, “Multirate Signal Processing for Communication Systems,” Prentice Hall, 2004, ISBN 978-0131465114 2. Lin, Phoong & Vaidyanathan, “Filter Bank Transceivers for OFDM and DMT Systems, Cambridge University Press, 2011, ISBN 978-1-107-00273-9 | 9 | 3 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 6 - 9 |

131 | EE6140 | Multi-Antenna Digital Communications Course No : EE6140Course Title : Multi-Antenna Digital CommunicationsPre Requisite : EE5140/EE4140/EE5142Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 8Total Hours PerWeek : 12Description : 1) To teach the fundamentals of multi-antenna digital communication systems 2) To expose graduate students to some recent results in this area Course Content : Preliminaries: Review of Gaussian random variables and vectors, Complex Gaussian random vectors, Detection in Gaussian noise, Probability of error, union bound, some definitions and results from Information theory Capacity of the vector Gaussian or MIMO channel, Ergodic Capacity of multi-antenna Gaussian channels with Rayleigh fading, Outage capacity of multi-antenna Gaussian channels with fading Spatial multiplexing: V-BLAST Space-time codes: Design criteria, Alamouti code, Orthogonal designs, Quasi-orthogonal space-time codes, Diversity-multiplexing gain trade-off MIMO with feedback: Long-term and short-term power constraints, delay-limited capacity Multiuser MIMO: Multiple access, broadcast Text Books : NIL Reference Books : [1] D. Tse, P. Viswanath, "Fundamentals of Wireless Communication," Cambridge University Press, 2005. [2] H. Jafarkhani, "Space-Time Coding: Theory and Practice," Cambridge University Press, 2005. [3] E. Biglieri, R. Calderbank, A. Constantinides, A. Goldsmith, A. Paulraj, H. V. Poor, "MIMO Wireless Communications," Cambridge University Press, 2007. [4] H. Huang, C. B. Papadias, S. Venkatesan, "MIMO Communication for Cellular Networks," Springer, 2012. [5] A. Goldsmith, "Wireless Communications," Cambridge University Press, 2005. [6] J. Choi, "Optimal Combining and Detection: Statistical Signal Processing for Communications," Cambridge University Press, 2010. [7] L. Sanguinetti and H. Vincent Poor, 'Fundamentals of Multi-User MIMO Communications', Chapter 6 in New Directions in Wireless Communications Research, Springer 2009. | 12 | 4 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 8 - 12 |

132 | EE6142 | Advanced Topics in Communications Course No : EE6142Course Title : Advanced Topics in CommunicationsPre Requisite : EE5142 or EE6340Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 6Total Hours PerWeek : 9Description : To teach students recent research and technology advances in the area that are of current interest. Course Content : Introduction: Recapitulation of pre-requisites - typical sequences and AEP, source and channel coding theorem, Gaussian channels.Network information theory: multiple access channels (MAC), Gaussian multiple access channels, fading multiple access channels; coding of correlated sources - Slepian-Wolf coding, linear coding of distributed sources; broadcast channelsNetwork coding: min-cut max-flow theorem for unicast networks, multiple unicast networks and network coding, linear network coding, deterministic algorithm for code design, random linear codes, approaches and results for non-multicast networks, function computation. Text Books : Reference Books : 1. Cover and Thomas, Elements of Information Theory, 2nd edition, Wiley-Interscience, 2006. 2. El Gamal and Y-H. Kim, Network Information Theory, Cambridge University Press, 2012. 3. R.Yeung, Information Theory and Network Coding, Springer, 2008. | 9 | 3 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 6 - 9 |

133 | EE6150 | Stochastic Modeling and the Theory of Queues Course No : EE6150Course Title : Stochastic Modeling and the Theory of QueuesPre Requisite : Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 8Total Hours PerWeek : 12Description : Course Content : 1. A short tour through basics (not very measure theoretic) of axiomatic probability theory, convergence, and laws of large numbers. 2. Discrete time Markov chains: class properties, stationary distribution, hitting and mixing times, coupling, and applications to queues and social networks. 3. Renewal theory: elementary renewal theorem, Wald's lemma, renewal reward theorem, and batch biasing (brief discussion on Key and Blackwell's renewal theorem). 4. Poisson process. 5. Continuous time Markov chains: stationarity, time reversal, Kelly's lemma, reversibility, and applications to social networks and queues. 6. (If time permits) Chernoff bound and introduction to large deviations; Martingales and concentration. ? Text Books : NIL Reference Books : NIL | 12 | 4 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 8 - 12 |

134 | EE6151 | Advanced Topics in Networks Course No : EE6151Course Title : Advanced Topics in NetworksPre Requisite : Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 6Total Hours PerWeek : 9Description : To teach students recent research and technology advances in the area that are of current interest. Course Content : To be decided Text Books : To be decided Reference Books : To be decided | 9 | 3 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 6 - 9 |

135 | EE6152 | Advanced Topics in Networks Course No : EE6152Course Title : Advanced Topics in NetworksPre Requisite : COTExtended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 6Total Hours PerWeek : 9Description : To teach students recent research and technology advances in the area that are of current interest. Course Content : Selection of topics from the text book. Text Books : Communication Networks: An Optimization, Control and Stochastic Networks PerspectiveBy R. Srikant and Lei YingCambridge University Press, 2014. Reference Books : Stochastic NetworksBy Frank Kelly and Elena YudovinaCambridge University Press, 2014. | 9 | 3 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 6 - 9 |

136 | EE6180 | Advanced Topics in Artificial Intelligence Course No : EE6180Course Title : Advanced Topics in Artificial IntelligencePre Requisite : EE5110Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 6Total Hours PerWeek : 0Description : To teach students recent research and technology advances in the area that are of current interest. Course Content : NIL Text Books : NIL Reference Books : NIL | 9 | 3 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 6 - 0 |

137 | EE6200 | Power Electronic Control of Electric Machines Course No : EE6200Course Title : Power Electronic Control of Electric MachinesPre Requisite : POWER ELECTRONICS for BTech/DD studentsExtended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 6Total Hours PerWeek : 0Description : This course is a graduate level course for Electrical Engineering students. This course introduces the students to various motor-load coupling arrangements, power ratings selection, performance characteristics etc., various control principles (ranging from basic to advance) of dc-dc and ac-dc power conversion systems and their effects on machines. Course Content : Principles of Drives Drive train methods – Gear, belt, Ball Screw arrangements. Thermal considerations for motor rating and overloads. Quadrants of operation. Stability considerations. Duty classes S1 – S10 and IP class. Relevant standards. DC Drives SCR bridge (3-phase) based drive: power circuit operation – continuous and discontinuous conduction – torque ripple. Line reactors for harmonic reduction. Modeling of drive and control system design, example. Control by back emf estimation. Two quadrant operation. H-bridge controlled drive and four quadrant operation Dual Converter based drives and control strategy for reversible operation. Field Weakening AC Drives: Induction Motor Drives Scalar Control methods Variable voltage method and its implementation in simulation – properties and behavior, limitations– loss and efficiency in variable slip operation Rotor resistance control / Rotor Chopper Control – implementation in simulation – analysis of performance – currents in rotor and stator. Slip energy recovery scheme – static Kramer drive – estimation of performance curves and control principles. V/f control, VSI – estimation of V/f characteristics, SPWM operations – selection of switching frequency – variable switching frequency. Various schemes of V/f implementation – constant slip, constant slip speed. Current Source Inverters and their usage for induction motor control - characteristics of CSI controlled drives. Triggering Schemes for CSI. Text Books : 1. W. Leonhard, Control of Electrical Drives, Springer, 3rd ed. 2001. 2. G.K.Dubey, Power Semiconductor Controlled Drives, Prentice Hall Publishers, 1993. Reference Books : 3. R. Krishnan, “Electric Motor Drives: Modeling, Analysis and Control”, Prentice Hall. 4. B. K. Bose, Power Electronics and Ac Drives, Prentice Hall, 1986. | 9 | 3 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 6 - 0 |

138 | EE6203 | Power Electronic System Design Course No : EE6203Course Title : Power Electronic System DesignPre Requisite : EE3203 or EE5200 or COTExtended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 6Total Hours PerWeek : 9Description : To introduce students to some of the practical design aspects related to power electronic systems. The various design aspects related to the device gate drive, passive components, thermals and electromagnetic compatibility which make up the power electronic system design will be covered in this course. Course Content : Devices, gate drive and protection: Power diode, power MOSFET, IGBT, SiC and GaN based devices, MOSFET/IGBT gate drive requirements and design, gate drive ICs, snubbers, Vce protection, PCB layout measures. Passives for Power Electronic Applications: Basics of MMF, flux, reluctance and B-H curves, inductor design, transformer design, magnetic materials, fringing, magnetic losses, capacitor types and selection, resistors for power electronic applications. Heatsink Selection for Power Electronic Converters: Device power losses, dynamic and steady state circuit model for heatsink, cooling fan selection, thermal protections. EMI/EMC: Basics of Common Mode (CM) and Differential Mode (DM), origin of common mode voltage and conducted EMI currents in power electronics, high frequency EMI circuit model, standards, basics of EMI filter design. Design of a few example applications. Text Books : 1. Mohan, Ned, Tore M. Undeland, and William P. Robbins. Power electronics: converters, applications, and design. John wiley & sons, 2003. 2. Ramanarayanan, V Course material on switched mode power conversion, ebook, IISc, 2007. Reference Books : 1. Ott, Henry W. Electromagnetic compatibility engineering. John Wiley & Sons, 2011. 2. Broadcom Application Notes: AN5336, AN5324, AN5315, AN5314 3. TDK Application Note: Aluminium Electrolytic Capacitors General Technical Information, TDK, 2019. 4. CDE Application Note: Aluminium Electrolytic Capacitor Application Guide, CDE. 5. Vishay Application Note 28910: Carbon Film MELF – Pulse Load Champion, Vishay, 2018. 6. Semikron Application Note: Power Semiconductors, Semikron, 2015 | 9 | 3 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 6 - 9 |

139 | EE6253 | Power System Control and Stability Course No : EE6253Course Title : Power System Control and StabilityPre Requisite : COTExtended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 6Total Hours PerWeek : 9Description : This course is an advanced level graduate course for students with power systems background. This course introduces the students to modeling of power system components for analyzing system stability. Methods of analyzing and enhancing power system stability are also dealt with. Course Content : Introduction to power systems stability problem: rotor angle stability, voltage stability, frequency stability, classification of stability Synchronous machine modeling, representation in stability, load representation, excitation systems, prime mover and governor Small signal stability: fundamental concepts, state space representation, eigen properties, single machine infinite bus systems, power systems stabilizer, multi machine systems Transient stability: numerical integration methods, simulations of power system dynamic response, direct method of transient stability assessment, transient energy function approach Voltage stability: basic concepts Sub-synchronous oscillations: turbine generator torsional oscillations, torsional interactions with power system controls, sub synchronous resonance, impact of network switching disturbances Transient stability enhancement: high speed fault clearing, dynamic braking, reduction of system reactance, control of HVDC transmission links etc. Text Books : 1. Peter W. Sauer and M. A. Pai, “Power system dynamics and stability”, Pearson Education, 1998. Reference Books : 1. K. R. Padiyar, "Power systems dynamics: stability and control", Second edition, BS Publications, 2002. 2. Paul M. Anderson, A. A. Fouad, "Power system control and stability", Second edition, Wiley-IEEE Press, 2002. 3. P. Kundur, “Power systems stability and control”, Tata McGraw-Hill, 1994. | 9 | 3 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 6 - 9 |

140 | EE6258 | DC Power Transmission Systems Course No : EE6258Course Title : DC Power Transmission SystemsPre Requisite : Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 6Total Hours PerWeek : 9Description : 1. To present a power transmission technology 2. To introduce the concept of control in the transmission network by using power electronic devices Course Content : Historical Developments Applications of DC Transmission, Comparison of AC and DC Transmission – Economics and Technical Performance Types of DC Links Converter Analysis – Line Commutated Converter (LCC) and Voltage Source Converter (VSC), 6 pulse and 12 pulse Converter Control – Current and Extinction Angle Control in LCC, Control of VSC Converter Faults Harmonic analysis, Design of AC Filters Reactive Power Control – Reactive power requirements, sources of reactive power – SVC, STATCOM Multiterminal DC System – Applications, Types, Control Text Books : 1. E.W. Kimbark, Direct Current Transmission, Vol. I, John Wiley, 1971 2. K.R. Padiyar, HVDC Power Transmission Systems, 2nd Edition, New Age International, 2010. Reference Books : 1. C. Adamson and N.G. Hingorani, High Voltage Direct Current Transmission, Garraway, 1960 2. E. Uhlman, Power Transmission by Direct Current, Springer-Verlag, 1975 3. J. Arrilaga, High Voltage Direct Current Transmission, 2nd Edition, IEE, 1998 | 9 | 3 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 6 - 9 |

141 | EE6261 | Restructured power systems Course No : EE6261Course Title : Restructured power systemsPre Requisite : Consent of Teacher (CoT)Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 6Total Hours PerWeek : 9Description : The conventional vertically integrated power systems are slowly becoming obsolete and many of the developed countries have deregulated electric power markets. In this context this course will introduce the concept of deregulation and the operation of electricity markets under deregulation. Course Content : Introduction: Vertically integrated power systems, unbundling, need for deregulation, benefits of deregulation, experience of deregulation in some of the developed countries and Challenges in deregulating electric markets in developing countries. Fundamentals of Economics: Types of market: monopoly, oligopoly and perfect competition. Inverse demand curves, supply curves, market clearing price, social benefit, deadweight loss, long-run and short-run costs. Imperfect competition: Cournot model and Bertrand model. Major Component of Deregulated Electricity Markets: Independent Power Providers (IPP), Independent System Operator (ISO), Transmission System Operator (TSO), distribution companies, retailers. Market Architecture: Bilateral trading, pool trading, Day-ahead markets, spot markets and markets for ancillary services. Hedging through forward contracts, futures and options. Economical Operation of Power Systems Under Deregulation: Economic load dispatch with profit maximization. Location Marginal Price (LMP) based on optimal power flow. Unit commitment: Lagrange relaxation method, mixed integer nonlinear programming (MINLP) and binary PSO. Transmission Pricing and Congestion: Embedded methods, true cost methods based on LMP, congestion rent based on LMP, market power due to congestion, Financial Transmission Rights (FTR), congestion management, Available Transfer Capability (ATC): Concept of ATC, Calculation of ATC. Investment in Generation: Discounted future cash flows, fixed cost recovery, Value of Lost Load (VOLL), regulator price caps for price spikes, optimal installed capacity based on VOLL. Indian Power Markets: Electricity Regulation Act 2003, unbundling the electricity market, power exchanges: operation procedure, rules and regulations, ABT. Text Books : 1. Mohammad Shahidehpour, Muwaffaq Alomoush, “Restructured Electrical Power Systems: Operation, Trading and Volatility”, Marcel Dekker Inc., 2001. 2. Kankar Bhattacharya, Math H. J. Bollen, Jaap E. Daalder, ”Operation of Restructured Power Systems” Kluwer Academic Publishers, 2001. Reference Books : 1. Daniel S. Kirschen and Goran Strbac, “Fundamentals of Power System Economics”, Wiley, 2006. 2. Steven Stoft, “Power System Economics: Designing Markets for Electricity”, IEEE Press, 2002. 3. Allen J. Wood, Bruce F. Wollenberg, “Power Generation Operation and Control”, Wiley, 1996. 4. Gerald B. Sheblé, “Computational Auction Mechanisms for Restructured Power Industry Operation” Springer, 1999. 5. Joe H. Chow, Felix F. Wu , James A. Momoh, “Applied Mathematics for Restructured Electric Power Systems: Optimization, Control, and Computational Intelligence”, Springer 2010. 6. Marija Ilic Francisco Galiana, Lester Fink, “Power Systems Restructuring: Engineering and Economics”, Kluwer Academic, 1998 7. Central Electricity Regulatory Commission (CERC) of India, “Electricity Regulation ACT 2003”, http://www.cercind.gov.in/electricty-act.html. | 9 | 3 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 6 - 9 |

142 | EE6262 | Advanced Motor Control Course No : EE6262Course Title : Advanced Motor ControlPre Requisite : Power Electronic Control of Electrical MachinesExtended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 6Total Hours PerWeek : 0Description : This course is an advanced level graduate course for Electrical Engineering students. This course introduces the students to advanced control techniques of modern ac motor drives that include induction motor drives, BLDC motor drives, PMSM drives and switched reluctance motor drives. Course Content : Induction Motor Drives Vector Control: Machine equations – indirect vector, direct vector control, estimation of flux vectors, current and voltage methods. DTC/DSC and their triggering strategies – with and without sector identification. Sensorless control of Induction Machines – methods of speed identification. Position estimation by signal injection Rotor Controlled induction machines – theory of power flow and control of rotor side converters BLDC drives Theory of operation of machine and bridge – triggering based on hall sensors – Control loop – sensorless control methods. PMSM drives Modelling of PMSM machines. Vector control of PMSM drives – performance characteristics – flux weakening for extending speed range. Sensorless control of PMSM drives Switched Reluctance Motor drives Introduction to the machine and controller structure – determination of inductance variations and torque performance. Text Books : 1. P.C. Krause, O. Wasynczuk, and S. D. Sudhoff, “Analysis of Electric Machinery”, McGraw-Hill Book Company. 2. R. Krishnan, “Electric Motor Drives: Modeling, Analysis and Control”, Prentice Hall. 3. W. Leonhard, Control of Electrical Drives, Springer, 3rd ed. 2001. 4. R. Krishnan, Electric Motor Drives: Modeling, Analysis, and Control, Prentice Hall, 2001. Reference Books : 5. P. Vas, Sensorless Vector and Direct Torque Control, Oxford University Press, 1998. 6. B. K. Bose, Power Electronics and Ac Drives, Prentice Hall, 1986. 7. I. Boldea and S.A Nasar, Electric Drives, CRC Press, 2nd ed. 2006. | 9 | 3 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 6 - 0 |

143 | EE6265 | Power System Operation and Planning Course No : EE6265Course Title : Power System Operation and PlanningPre Requisite : Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 0Total Hours PerWeek : 0Description : This course is an advanced level graduate course for Electrical Engineering students in the area of power systems. This course introduces the students to various operation and planning of electric power systems. Recent advances in Operational Planning of Power Systems, with Integration of Renewable Energy Sources will be covered. Course Content : I. Power System Operation Economic Studies: Economic Operation, Economic Dispatch Unit Commitment Concepts and Solution Methods, Cost Based Operation and Price Based Operational Studies. Operational Studies: Operating States of Power System, Security Studies, Operation under Emergencies, Power System Operation and Restorative Strategies, Optimal Economic Operation under restructured and deregulated power system Recent Developments: Availability Based Tariff (ABT), Unscheduled Interchange (UI) and Calculation, Indian Power Exchanges, IEX, PXIL, II. Power System Planning Basic Principles of Power Systems Planning, Issues in Planning, Economic Principles, Load / Price Forecasting: Classification of Electric Load Forecasting, Forecasting Perspectives and Drivers, Methods of Forecasting, Time Series, Regression Methods, Wind Power Forecasting, Solar irradiation forecasting. , Dynamic Pricing and Real time Price Forecasting. Electricity Price Forecasting, Price Volatility, Methods of forecasting Demand Side Management: Concepts and Characteristics of Demand Side Management, Benefits and Implementation, Evaluation of DSM Alternatives, System Expansion Studies: Generation Expansion Planning (GEP), Transmission Expansion Planning (TEP), Distribution Expansion Planning (DEP), Substation, Expansion Planning (SEP), Network Expansion Planning (NEP), Reactive Power Planning (RPP), Integrated Resource Planning: Integration of renewable Energy Sources, Supply and Demand Interaction, Pricing of renewable energy, Power System Planning under uncertainties. Planning Tools: Data Collection Decision Support Analysis and Decision Aiding Tools, Strategic Planning, Financial Analysis tools, Computational Methods, ARMA, GAMS. Wein Automatic System Planning (WASP) Package for Power system Planning. Text Books : 1. Hossein Seifi and Mohannad Sadegn Sepasian, “Electric Power System Planning: Issues, Algorithms and Solutions”, Springer 2011. Reference Books : 2. X.Wang, and J. R. McDonald, “Modern Power Systems Planning”, McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1994. 3. H. Lee Willis, “Power Distribution Planning Reference Book’, CRC Press, 1997. 4. U. G. Knight, ‘Power Systems in Emergencies: From Contingency Planning to Crisis Management”, John Wiley, 2001. 5. Karl Frauendorfer, Hand Glasitsch, Rainer Bacher (Eds), Optimization in Planning and Operation of Electric Power Systems’, Lecture notes of the SVOR/ASRO Tutorial, 1992. | 9 | 3 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 0 |

144 | EE6310 | Seminar Course No : EE6310Course Title : SeminarPre Requisite : Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 3Total Hours PerWeek : 0Description : To allow a student to gain understanding of a particular topic and also present it to his peers in a clear and understandable manner. Course Content : Students will present a topic of their choice but related to EE. They will be graded on their understanding of the topic and various aspects of their presentation. Text Books : None Reference Books : None | 3 | 0 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 3 - 0 |

145 | EE6320 | RF Integrated Circuits Course No : EE6320Course Title : RF Integrated CircuitsPre Requisite : EE5310 or EE3002Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 8Total Hours PerWeek : 12Description : The goal of this course is to teach students who have some knowledge of basic analog circuits and IC design to analyze and design RF integrated circuits that are used in modern wireless communication systems. The course will include design projects on RF building blocks such as LNA, Mixer and VCO. Course Content : 1. LC resonant circuits and RF impedance matching 2. RF systems concepts – definitions of noise figure & IIP3; cascaded systems 3. Design of Low noise amplifiers 4. Design of active and passive mixers 5. Design of LC Oscillators 6. Design of Power amplifiers 7. Transmitter and receiver architectures Text Books : RF Microelectronics by Behzad Razavi, 2nd Edition (2013) (Publisher: Pearson), ISBN-10: 9789332518636, ISBN-13: 978-9332518636 Reference Books : The Design Of CMOS Radio-Frequency Integrated Circuits by Thomas H. Lee, 2nd Edition (2004) (Publisher: Cambridge University Press), ISBN-10: 9780521613897, ISBN-13: 978-0521613897 | 12 | 4 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 8 - 12 |

146 | EE6320W | RF Integrated Circuits Course No : EE6320WCourse Title : RF Integrated CircuitsPre Requisite : EE5310 or EE3002Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 3Total Hours PerWeek : 3Description : The goal of this course is to teach students who have some knowledge of basic analog circuits and IC design to analyze and design RF integrated circuits that are used in modern wireless communication systems. The course will include design projects on RF building blocks such as LNA, Mixer and VCO. Course Content : 1. LC resonant circuits and RF impedance matching2. RF systems concepts – definitions of noise figure & IIP3; cascaded systems3. Design of Low noise amplifiers4. Design of active and passive mixers5. Design of LC Oscillators6. Transmitter and receiver architectures Text Books : RF Microelectronics by Behzad Razavi, 2nd Edition (2013) (Publisher: Pearson), ISBN-10: 9789332518636, ISBN-13: 978-9332518636 Reference Books : The Design Of CMOS Radio-Frequency Integrated Circuits by Thomas H. Lee, 2nd Edition (2004) (Publisher: Cambridge University Press), ISBN-10: 9780521613897, ISBN-13: 978-0521613897 | 9 | 3 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 3 - 3 |

147 | EE6321 | VLSI Data Conversion Circuits Course No : EE6321Course Title : VLSI Data Conversion CircuitsPre Requisite : Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 8Total Hours PerWeek : 12Description : To teach the fundamentals of analog-to-digital and digital-to-analog converter systems and circuits. Course Content : Sampling and sample-and-hold circuits, quantization, ADC and DAC metrics, a survey ADC and DAC architectures. Flash ADCs, oversampling (delta-sigma) ADCs and DACs, discrete and continuous-time integrators and circuit techniques. Current steering and resistive DACs. Basics of dynamic element matching. Text Books : Class notes and selected papers from IEEE journals. Reference Books : [1] S.Pavan, R.Schreier and G.Temes, Understanding Delta-Sigma Data Converters, Wiley-IEEE Press, 2017. | 12 | 4 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 8 - 12 |

148 | EE6321W | VLSI Data Conversion Circuits Course No : EE6321WCourse Title : VLSI Data Conversion CircuitsPre Requisite : Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 8Total Hours PerWeek : 12Description : To teach the fundamentals of analog-to-digital and digital-to-analog converter systems and circuits. Course Content : Sampling and sample-and-hold circuits, quantization, ADC and DAC metrics, a survey ADC and DAC architectures. Flash ADCs, oversampling (delta-sigma) ADCs and DACs,discrete and continuous-time integrators and circuit techniques. Current steering and resistive DACs. Basics of dynamic element matching. Text Books : Class notes and selected papers from IEEE journals. Reference Books : [1] S.Pavan, R.Schreier and G.Temes, Understanding Delta-Sigma Data Converters, Wiley-IEEE Press, 2017. | 12 | 4 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 8 - 12 |

149 | EE6322 | VLSI Broadband Communication Circuits Course No : EE6322Course Title : VLSI Broadband Communication CircuitsPre Requisite : EC2102, EC3002Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 8Total Hours PerWeek : 12Description : This course aims to provide an understanding of signal degradation through broadband links, techniques to combat them, and integrated circuit implementation of these techniques.The term "broadband" refers to the class of signals which have significant spectral energy from very low frequencies to the data rate of the signal. i.e. signals that are not modulated on a carrier whose frequency far exceeds the bandwidth. Broadband digital communication links over a variety of physical media-printed circuit boards, cables, optical fibres-are ubiqutous, e.g Ethernet, USB. Course Content : Digital signal transmission; Drivers and receivers for low frequencies; Serialization and Deserialization; Digital signal transmission over lossy and dispersive channels; Eye diagrams; Eye closure; crosstalk, and jitter; Equalization: Linear and non-linear equalizers; Integrated circuit implementation of broadband ampliers for transmission and reception, feedforward and decision feedback equalization; Synchronization: clock and data recovery circuits using phase locked loops and delay locked loops; Text Books : None Reference Books : William J. Dally, John W. Poulton, Digital Systems Engineering, Cambridge University Press, 1998. Papers from the IEEE Journal of Solid State Circuits, and the IEEE Transactions on Circuits and Systems, IEEE. http://ieeexplore.ieee.org Behzad Razavi, Monolithic Phase Locked Loops and Clock Recovery Circuits-Theory and Design, IEEE Press, 1996. Behzad Razavi, Phase Locking in High Performance Systems-From Devices to Architectures, IEEE Press, 2003. Behzad Razavi, Design of Integrated Circuits for Optical Communications, McGraw-Hill, 2002. | 12 | 3 - 1 - 0 - 0 - 8 - 12 |

150 | EE6322W | VLSI Broadband Communication Circuits Course No : EE6322WCourse Title : VLSI Broadband Communication CircuitsPre Requisite : EC2102, EC3002Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 8Total Hours PerWeek : 12Description : This course aims to provide an understanding of signal degradation through broadband links, techniques to combat them, and integrated circuit implementation of these techniques.The term "broadband" refers to the class of signals which have significant spectral energy from very low frequencies to the data rate of the signal. i.e. signals that are not modulated on a carrier whose frequency far exceeds the bandwidth. Broadband digital communication links over a variety of physical media-printed circuit boards, cables, optical fibres-are ubiqutous, e.g Ethernet, USB. Course Content : Digital signal transmission; Drivers and receivers for low frequencies; Serialization and Deserialization; Digital signal transmission over lossy and dispersive channels; Eye diagrams; Eye closure; crosstalk, and jitter; Equalization: Linear and non-linear equalizers; Integrated circuit implementation of broadband ampliers for transmission and reception, feedforward and decision feedback equalization; Synchronization: clock and data recovery circuits using phase locked loops and delay locked loops; Text Books : None Reference Books : William J. Dally, John W. Poulton, Digital Systems Engineering, Cambridge University Press, 1998.Papers from the IEEE Journal of Solid State Circuits, and the IEEE Transactions on Circuits and Systems, IEEE. http://ieeexplore.ieee.orgBehzad Razavi, Monolithic Phase Locked Loops and Clock Recovery Circuits-Theory and Design, IEEE Press, 1996.Behzad Razavi, Phase Locking in High Performance Systems-From Devices to Architectures, IEEE Press, 2003.Behzad Razavi, Design of Integrated Circuits for Optical Communications, McGraw-Hill, 2002. | 12 | 0 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 8 - 12 |

151 | EE6323 | Wireless System Design Course No : EE6323Course Title : Wireless System DesignPre Requisite : Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 6Total Hours PerWeek : 9Description : This is a course that will span two sub-areas of EE, namely Wireless Communications and RF Systems. At the end of this course, the student will 1) be able to understand and design the baseband and RF portion of any wireless communication system 2) be able to perform link budget analysis for the system 3) have completely designed the BB and RF portion of one particular wireless standard Course Content : Module I. Digital communications fundamentalsModule II. RF transceiver architecturesModule III. Transmitters (from DAC output to antenna)Module IV. Receivers (from antenna to ADC input)Module V. Non-idealities in RF/analog and their effectsModule VI. Understand specifications of wireless standard under considerationModule VII. Link Budget AnalysisModule VIII. Calibration Text Books : 1. Tzi-Dar Chiueh, Pei-Yun Tsai, I-Wei Lai, “Baseband Receiver Design for Wireless MIMO-OFDM Communications”, Wiley-Blackwell; 2nd Edition (Import, 26 June 2012), ISBN13: 97811181881872. Behzad Razavi, ”RF Microelectronics” Pearson India, 2nd Edition (2014), ISBN13: 9789332518636 Reference Books : None. | 9 | 3 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 6 - 9 |

152 | EE6324 | Phase-Locked Loops Course No : EE6324Course Title : Phase-Locked LoopsPre Requisite : EE3002Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 8Total Hours PerWeek : 12Description : To develop basic understanding of phase-locked loops with thorough knowledge of fundamental operation principles. Emphasis is on developing intuition behind designs, learning mathematical basis behind operation, and realizing PLLs at architecture and transistor level. Exposure to state-of-the-art frequency synthesis techniques for narrow/broadband communication. Course Content : System and circuit level realization of integer/fractional-N phase-locked loops (PLL), delay-locked loop (DLL), multiplying-DLL, injection-locked PLLs, and sub-sampled PLLs. Analog and digital implementation of building blocks including phase/frequency detectors, charge-pump, LC/ring-oscillators, multi-modulus frequency dividers, active/passive loop filter, voltage/current controlled delay line, phase interpolators, etc. Supply regulation of frequency synthesizers. Narrowband signal modulation within frequency synthesis loop. Text Books : W. F. Eagen, “Phase-lock Basics,” Wiley-IEEE Press, 2008 Reference Books : F. M. Gardner, “Phaselock Techniques,” John Wiley & Sons, 2005R. Best, “Phase-locked Loops: Design, Simulation, and Applications,” McGraw Hill, 2003 | 12 | 4 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 8 - 12 |

153 | EE6324W | Phase-Locked Loops Course No : EE6324WCourse Title : Phase-Locked LoopsPre Requisite : EE3002Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 8Total Hours PerWeek : 12Description : To develop basic understanding of phase-locked loops with thorough knowledge of fundamental operation principles. Emphasis is on developing intuition behind designs, learning mathematical basis behind operation, and realizing PLLs at architecture and transistor level. Exposure to state-of-the-art frequency synthesis techniques for narrow/broadband communication. Course Content : System and circuit level realization of integer/fractional-N phase-locked loops (PLL), delay-locked loop (DLL), multiplying-DLL, injection-locked PLLs, and sub-sampled PLLs. Analog and digital implementation of building blocks including phase/frequency detectors, charge-pump, LC/ring-oscillators, multi-modulus frequency dividers, active/passive loop filter, voltage/current controlled delay line, phase interpolators, etc. Supply regulation of frequency synthesizers. Narrowband signal modulation within frequency synthesis loop. Text Books : W. F. Eagen, “Phase-lock Basics,” Wiley-IEEE Press, 2008 Reference Books : F. M. Gardner, “Phaselock Techniques,” John Wiley & Sons, 2005R. Best, “Phase-locked Loops: Design, Simulation, and Applications,” McGraw Hill, 2003 | 12 | 4 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 8 - 12 |

154 | EE6325 | Advanced Power Management Systems Course No : EE6325Course Title : Advanced Power Management SystemsPre Requisite : VLSI Power Management CircuitsExtended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 8Total Hours PerWeek : 0Description : To develop understanding of various modules of a power management system needed for specific applications. Understanding various components of a power management module and challenges associated with each module. The course should build the foundation for research in power management ICs. Learning Outcomes: By the end of this course, students should be able to understand need of application specific power management modules and challenges associated with them. They should have developed in-depth circuit and system level knowledge of each power module to identify the real world problems and work towards the solution for their future research. Course Content : Unit-1: Battery Charger and Management System Battery types – Li-ion, Li-polymer, NiMh, NiCd, lead acid, battery profiles and electrical models, battery capacity, battery ID resistor, Linear Vs Switched mode chargers, charging modes-trickle charging, constant current charging, constant voltage charging, fast charging, pulse charging, wireless charging, battery insertion/removal detection, under-voltage (UV) and over-voltage (OV) detection, end of charge (EoC) estimation, battery ESR estimation, battery open circuit voltage (OCV), battery state of charge (SoC), coulomb counting, voltage and current measurement, temperature measurement, voltage mode fuel gauge, estimation of battery time constant. Unit-2: Energy Harvesting for IoT Applications of energy harvesting (wearables, remote sensing, biomedical, structural health monitoring, wireless charging), energy sources (RF, solar, thermal, mechanical), PV cells, thermoelectric generator, piezo vibrator, maximum power point tracking, low power AC-DC converter, capacitive charge-pump, design of ultra low power controller for dc-dc converters, low power LDOs and voltage/current reference circuits, burst mode/duty cycling for low power operation. Unit-3: High Performance DC-DC Converters Envelope tracking power supplies, ripple cancellation/reduction techniques, EMI reduction techniques (spread spectrum, frequency hopping), hybrid linear and switching regulators, multi-phase switching converters, converters with coupled inductors, auto-tunable dc-dc converters, fixed frequency hysteretic converters. Unit-4: Power Management for Lighting and Display Applications Types of LEDs, LED characteristics and electrical model, LED drivers and applications, LED drivers for camera flash, LCD power supplies, AMOLED display supplies, LED drivers for display backlight, effect of LED mismatch on display, flickering, LED drivers for home lighting, RGB LED drivers, analog and digital dimming. Unit-5: Power Management for Haptics and Motor Drives Types of motors (DC, Stepper, BLDC, Linear/Resonant) and electrical models, H-Bridge driver, PWM Vs. Linear driver, differential and singled ended driver, sensor-less drive, back EMF sensing techniques, overdrive and braking, short and open circuit detection. Text Books : Power Management Techniques for Integrated Circuit Design By Ke-Horng Chen Publisher: Wiley-Blackwell (29 July 2016) ISBN-10: 1118896815 ISBN-13: 978-1118896815 Reference Books : 1. Battery Power Management for Portable Devices by Yevgen Barsukov, Jinrong Qian Publisher: Artech House Publishers (1 April 2013) Language: English ISBN-10: 1608074919 ISBN-13: 978-1608074914 2. Energy Harvesting Technologies 2009th Edition by Shashank Priya (Editor), Daniel J. Inman (Editor) Publisher: Springer; 2009 edition (December 18, 2008) Language: English ISBN-10: 0387764631 ISBN-13: 978-0387764634 | 12 | 4 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 8 - 0 |

155 | EE6326 | Integrated Circuit Design and Testing Course No : EE6326Course Title : Integrated Circuit Design and TestingPre Requisite : EE3002Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 6Total Hours PerWeek : 12Description : To go through all the steps involved in IC design and testing. These include transistor level circuit design of building blocks, integration of building blocks in the pad frame, choice of package, fabrication in an external foundry, pcb design, and testing. At the end of the course, the students should have designed an IC, sent it for fabrication in an external foundry, and tested the fabricated IC. Course Content : * Components on an analog IC; Simulation of component characteristics * Analog IC building blocks; * Layout of components on an IC; Ratiometric layout; Matching considerations, dummy devices * Putting together the building blocks; Top level wiring of signals and supplies * Package parasitics and simulation * PCB design * Testing Text Books : N/A Reference Books : * Behzad Razavi, Design of Analog CMOS Integrated Circuits, 2nd ed., McGraw Hill Education, 2017. * Carusone, Johns, and Martin, Analog Integrated Circuit Design, Wiley, 2011. * Gray, Hurst, Lewis, and Meyer, Analysis and Design of Analog Integrated Circuits, 5th ed., Wiley 2009. * Hastings, The Art of Analog Layout, 2nd ed., Pearson, 2005 * Tsividis, Mixed Analog–Digital VLSI Devices and Technology | 12 | 2 - 0 - 4 - 0 - 6 - 12 |

156 | EE6331 | Embedded Memory Design Course No : EE6331Course Title : Embedded Memory DesignPre Requisite : EE5311Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 6Total Hours PerWeek : 9Description : Learning Objectives: Part 1-Static Random Access Memory (SRAM) Design Articulate memory hierarchy and the value proposition of SRAMs in the memory chain + utilization in current processors Explain SRAM building blocks and peripheral operations and memory architecture (with physical arrangement) Articulate commonly used SRAM cells (6T vs 8T), their advantages and disadvantages Explain the operation of a non-conventional SRAM cells, and their limitations Explain commonly used assist methods Explain how variations impact memory cells Part 2- Embedded Dynamic Random Access Memory (eDRAM) Design Explain the working of a (e)DRAM and what Embedded means? Explain the working of a feedback sense amplifier and modify existing designs to improve performance Calculate the voltage levels of operation of various components for an eDRAM Introduce stacked protect devices to reduce voltage stress of the WL driver Explain when an eDRAM can be faster than an SRAM Part 3: Embedded Non Volatile Memory(eNVM) Design Construct circuits to enable high voltage programming an eNVM element Design sense amplifiers to read in the eNVM element Explain the design techniques to achieve optimal programming of an eNVM element Course Content : Contents: SRAM: Memory hierarchy Memory organization Flip flop 6T SRAM basics 6T SRAM cell Static/ Read and Write noise margins Read/ Write/ Hold and Access failures Column interleaving Alternative Cell Types Impact of Variation Redundancy Modes of failure Assist Circuits BTI Stress Memory Testing Power Variation characterization eDRAM: Basics of DRAM Definition of Embedded Requirement for short BLs in DRAMs Transfer ratio Retention time/ Refresh rate analysis Power supplies required for eDRAM Advantages of eDRAM over eSRAM Write time calculation Hierarchical sensing 3T Micro Sense Amp Micro Sense Amp Evolution Read time calculation SOI Technology - Floating body effects on eDRAM Gated Feedback Sense Amplifier Variability study Thick Oxide Word-line drivers Thin Oxide Word-line drivers Redundancy and Testing Non Volatile Memories Charge Trap Transistor Text Books : Course will be taught from current literature. Reference Books : Course will be taught from current literature. | 9 | 3 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 6 - 9 |

157 | EE6341 | Compact Modeling of Devices in Integrated Circuit Design Course No : EE6341Course Title : Compact Modeling of Devices in Integrated Circuit DesignPre Requisite : EE3001 or EE5313Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 8Total Hours PerWeek : 12Description : To bridge the gap in the knowledge of technology and circuit design from the perspective of modern industry standard device models. Course Content : Essential goals and features of compact modeling; large-signal and small-signal model variables, model equations and parameter extractions; model implementation in Verilog-A and simulations. Model development, implementation and testing for bipolar transistors: intrinsic, internal and complete device structures and respective model equivalent circuits; integral charge control relations (ICCR) and transfer current; internal base resistance and capacitance; static and dynamic model behavior; various second order effects such as non-quasi-static delay, high frequency noise correlation, electrothermal heating etc.; industry-standard models. Model development, implementation and testing for field effect transistors: threshold voltage-based, surface potential based and charge-based models; Gummel symmetry and its effects; various short channel effects; gate leakage currents; various charge components and non-reciprocal capacitances; industry-standard models. Text Books : 1. M. Schröter and Anjan Chakravorty, “Compact Hierarchical Bipolar Transistor Modeling with HICUM”, World Scientific, 2010. 2. Christian C. Enz and Eric A. Vittoz, “Charge Based MOS Transistor Modeling : The EKV Model for Low power and RF IC Design”, John Wiley & Sons, Ltd., 2006. Reference Books : 1. Y. Tsividis, “Operation and Modeling of the MOS Transistor”, McGraw Hill, Boston, 1999. 2. Ian E Getreu,“Modeling the Bipolar Transistor”, Tektronix, Beaverton, 1976. 3. IEEE papers. | 12 | 4 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 8 - 12 |

158 | EE6343 | Special Electronic Devices Course No : EE6343Course Title : Special Electronic DevicesPre Requisite : Solid state devices, quantum mechanicsExtended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 6Total Hours PerWeek : 9Description : Develop an understanding on the effects of electron spin, its use in magnetoelectronics and spintronics, and devices such as magnetic tunnel junctions, spin torque nano-oscillators and spin-FETs. Course Content : Quantum mechanics: Energy quantization, Density of states, Free electron wave function and the Schrodinger equation Potential barrier and well, Scattering matrix formalism and treatment of multiple barriers/wells, Hund's Rule, Coherent spin polarized tunneling, spinors, spin-torque Micromagnetic simulations and applications: Spin valve, Magnetic Reed Sensors, Circular nanomagnets, Nano-particle Boolean logic, spin torque nano-oscillators, spin waves and magnonic devicexs Text Books : Principles of Quantum Mechanics: R. Shankar Magnetoelectronics: Mark Johnson Spin Waves - Theory and Applications: D. D. Stancil and A. Prabhakar Reference Books : Introduction to Spintronics: Supriyo Bandyopadhyay and Marc Cahay | 9 | 3 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 6 - 9 |

159 | EE6345 | Advanced Memory Technology Course No : EE6345Course Title : Advanced Memory TechnologyPre Requisite : EE5313 Semiconductor device modeling or equivalent desiredExtended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 6Total Hours PerWeek : 9Description : This course will provide a systematic exploration of various memory technologies since 1950s and its key concepts, device physics, essential properties for technology and challenges. This is followed by major focus on device/technology aspects of numerous emerging memory technologies including PCM, MRAM, FeRAM, RRAM and also its importance towards realizing universal memory for future high speed computing. A strong emphasize will be given throughout this course on the interdisciplinary nature of learning device physics, electrical, thermal and structural properties of various materials that are essentially governing technical specifications of memory devices. Course Content : Introduction to memory devices: Evolution and history; archival data storage; advances in optical memories. Non-volatile memory devices: Magnetic memories, HDDs; Silicon based thin film transistor non-volatile memories; Flash memories, classification and operation; challenges; advancements in vertically stackable arrays. Volatile memory devices: Random access memories, classification and operation; SRAMs; DRAMs; history and challenges. Emerging memory technologies: Phase Change Memory (PCM); Magneto-resistive Random Access Memory (MRAM); Ferroelectric Random Access Memory (FeRAM), Resisitive Random Access Memory (RRAM); Comparison and future direction towards universal memory concepts. Text Books : 1. Tseung-Yuen Tseng and Simon M. Sze, Nonvolatile memories-Materials, Devices and Applications, Volume 1 and 2, ISBN: 1-58883-250-3 2. Joe Brewer and Manzur Gill, Nonvolatile memory technologies with emphasis on Flash, IEEE Press series on microelectronic systems, WILEY-INTERSCIENCE 2008, ISBN: 978-0471-77002-2 3. Simone Raoux and Matthias Wuttig, Phase change materials-Science and Applications, Springer 2009, ISBN: 978-0-387-84873-0 Reference Books : 1. Seungbum Hong, Orlando Auciello, Dirk Wouters, Emerging Non-Volatile Memories, springer 2014, ISBN 978-1-4899-7537-9 2. Betty Prince, Vertical 3D Memory Technologies, Wiley 2014, ISBN: 978-1118760512 | 9 | 3 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 6 - 9 |

160 | EE6346 | Advanced CMOS Devices and Technology Course No : EE6346Course Title : Advanced CMOS Devices and TechnologyPre Requisite : EC3101Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 6Total Hours PerWeek : 9Description : To teach the basics of how modern CMOS devices are designed for better power-performance compared to previous generation when simple geometric shrinking no longer works. This will be useful for both designers and technologists who want to work on advanced nodes as there is a lot of design-technology interaction needed for a successful tape out Course Content : Review of CMOS scaling. Problems with traditional geometric scaling. Power crisis Mobility enhancement techniques. Review of stress and strain, how it affects band structure of silicon. Types and realization of stress elements. Problems with stress elements Gate oxide scaling trend. Urgency to switch gate dielectric material. High K material selection. Fermi level pinning Process integration of high K gate dielectrics and metal gates Multi-gate transistors. Ways of realization. Fabrication issues and integration challenges Ultra shallow junction. Dopant activation methods. Reduction of parasitic RC Analog and digital benchmarking of models. Layout dependent effects. Test structures used for characterization. Variations and how it can affect scaling. Basics of sub wavelength lithography. Design for manufacturability Text Books : No single textbook is available Reference Books : 1. Hei Wong , “Nano-CMOS Gate Dielectric Engineering,” CRC, 2011. 2. J.-P. Colinge, “FinFETs and Other Multi-Gate Transistors,” Springer, 2010. 3. S. Deleonibus, “Electronic Device Architectures for the Nano-CMOS Era,” Pan Stanford 2009 4. B. Wong, A. Mittal, Y. Cao, G. Starr, “Nano-CMOS Circuit and Physical Design”, Wiley Inter-science 2004 5. B. Wong, F. Zach, V. Moroz, A. Mittal, G. Starr, A. Kahng, “Nano-CMOS Design for Manufacturability”, Wiley 2009 6. A. Dimoulas, E. Gusev, P.C. McIntyre, M. Heyns (Eds.), "Advanced Gate Stacks for High-Mobility Semiconductors", Springer 2007 | 9 | 3 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 6 - 9 |

161 | EE6347 | Devices and technologies for AI and neuromorphic computing Course No : EE6347Course Title : Devices and technologies for AI and neuromorphic computingPre Requisite : EE3001 and/or EE5313Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 6Total Hours PerWeek : 9Description : To provide an in-depth introduction to hardware implementations of neural networks using post-CMOS technologies. At the end of this course students should be able to: i) identify the role of neurons as information processing units, ii) identify different types of ANNs and develop a basic understanding of learning algorithms, iii) evaluate transport in memristive devices and build memristor models, iv) identify design challenges in memristive crossbar arrays, v) evaluate device characteristics of Mott insulators and threshold switching resistive switches as neurons, vi) understand system-level requirements and challenges for hardware accelerators with post-CMOS technologies. Course Content : Neurons as computational units: models for neurons (Hodgkin-Huxley; Leaky-integrate and Fire), Learning in artificial neural networks: types of ANNs, learning algorithms, role of non-volatile memory devices as synapses and device requirements, physics of filamentary memristive devices, modeling of memristive devices, memristive crossbar arrays: design challenges and requirement of selectors, emerging devices for artificial neurons (Mott insulators, threshold switching resistive switches). Text Books : Carver Mead, Analog VLSI and Neural Systems, Addison-Wesley, ISBN-13: 978-0201059922, 1989 Tseung-Yuen Tseng and Simon M. Sze, Nonvolatile memories-Materials, Devices and Applications, Volume 1 and 2, ISBN: 1-58883-250-3, 2012 Manan Suri (Ed.), Advances in Neuromorphic Hardware Exploiting Emerging Nanoscale Devices, Springer, ISBN ISBN 978-81-322-3703-7, 2017 Reference Books : J. J. Yang et al., Memristive devices for computing, Nature Nanotechnology, vol. 8, 13-24 (2013) D. Kuzum et al., Synaptic electronics: materials, devices and applications, Nanotechnology, vol. 24, 382001 (2013) H. S. P. Wong et al., Metal Oxide RRAM, Proceedings of the IEEE, vol. 100, 1951-1970 (2012) | 9 | 3 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 6 - 9 |

162 | EE6350 | Analysis of noise in systems Course No : EE6350Course Title : Analysis of noise in systemsPre Requisite : Basic probability courseExtended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 6Total Hours PerWeek : 9Description : Will learn techniques to analyse systems driven by stochastic inputs. Course Content : Review of random processes: Basice random processes, Time and ensemble averages, ergodicity, stationary, cyclostationary and non-stationary processes, spectral density. Modelling of thermal noise, shot noise, random telegraph noise, 1/f noise and quantization noise Response of linear time-invariant and time-varying circuits and systems to random inputs, signal to noise ratio, noise figure, effect of quantization noise on signal processing systems. Phase noise in oscillators, noise in PLLs, analysis of timing jitter in data converters Text Books : None Reference Books : 1. A.Papoulis and S.Pillai, Probability, Random Variables and Stochastic processes, McGraw Hill. 2. B.Widrow amd I. Kollar, Quantization noise, Cambridge university press. 3. Selected papers | 9 | 3 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 6 - 9 |

163 | EE6362 | Advanced Topics in Microelectronics and MEMS Course No : EE6362Course Title : Advanced Topics in Microelectronics and MEMSPre Requisite : EE3001 or EE5313Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 6Total Hours PerWeek : 9Description : To teach students recent research and technology advances in the area that are of current interest. Course Content : Part 1: Fundamentals of neural networks What is a neural network and what is the use to build one? Basic building blocks of a neural network; learning; different types of neural networks Part 2: Electronic devices as artificial synapses From CMOS based neural accelerators to the next gen: need for emerging technologies; RRAMs; PCMs; FeRAMs; Spintronic devices ; Flash memory Part 3: Electronic devices for artificial neurons Types of artificial neurons (spiking, oscillatory); Insulator-metal transition in Mott insulators; threshold switching in resistive memory; negative capacitance transistors Text Books : 1. Carver Mead, Analog VLSI and Neural Systems, Addison-Wesley, ISBN-13: 978-0201059922 2. Tseung-Yuen Tseng and Simon M. Sze, Nonvolatile memories-Materials, Devices and Applications, Volume 1 and 2, ISBN: 1-58883-250-3 3. Manan Suri (Ed.), Advances in Neuromorphic Hardware Exploiting Emerging Nanoscale Devices, Springer, ISBN ISBN 978-81-322-3703-7 Reference Books : 1. J. J. Yang et al., Memristive devices for computing, Nature Nanotechnology, vol. 8, 13-24 (2013) 2. D. Kuzum et al., Synaptic electronics: materials, devices and applications, Nanotechnology, vol. 24, 382001 (2013) 3. H. S. P. Wong et al., Metal Oxide RRAM, Proceedings of the IEEE, vol. 100, 1951-1970 (2012) | 9 | 3 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 6 - 9 |

164 | EE6403 | Transducers Course No : EE6403Course Title : TransducersPre Requisite : Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 4Total Hours PerWeek : 0Description : To impart knowledge on transducers and train students to apply this knowledge and make measurements on physical parameters such as displacement, velocity, temperature, torque and speed Course Content : Transducers and their characteristics: Definition of terminologies – Generalized performance characteristics – range – resolution – linearity – overload factor – accuracy – precision – static and dynamic – rise time – fall time – settling time– slew rate – frequency response – bandwidth – modelling – Classification – ingress protection – vibration isolation – passive – active. Resistive Transducers: Resistance potentiometer – noise – resolution – signal conditioning – strain gauges – associated electrical circuitry – temperature compensation – load cells – torque and pressure measurement using strain gauges –resistive temperature device (RTD) – three-lead arrangement – thermistors – linearization - hot-wire anemometers – time constant improvement – measurement of direction of flow – peizo resistive transducers. 5 Experiments on signal conditioning applied to transducers Inductive Transducers: Self-inductance transducers – transverse armature and plunger type – sensitivity and linearity – signal conditioning circuits – choice of components – linear variable differential transducer (LVDT) – lead and lag compensation. Capacitive Transducers: Single – push-pull – angle transducer – humidity sensor – parasitic effects – solutions – signal conditioning circuits. Miscellaneous transducers: Peizo electric – signal conditioning – thermo couples – theory – mass-spring accelerometer – force-balance. Applications of transducers: Measurement of displacement (linear and angular) – velocity – acceleration – force – torque – pressure – flow – temperature. Text Books : 1. H. K. Neubert, ‘Instrument Transducers-An introduction to their performance and design’ Oxford University press, Oxford, Second edition-2003. Reference Books : 2. E. O. Doeblin ‘Measurement Systems – Application and Design’ McGraw - Hill Publications, Fifth Edition, 2004. | 12 | 3 - 0 - 3 - 0 - 4 - 0 |

165 | EE6412 | Optimal Control Course No : EE6412Course Title : Optimal ControlPre Requisite : EE3004 or equivalent, COTExtended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 8Total Hours PerWeek : 0Description : To introduce optimal control theory using tools from calculus of variations for finding extremals that minimize/maximize cost functionals, and derive optimal control using Pontryagin’s maximum principle. The course will also introduce numerical methods for solving problems related to practical applications. Course Content : 1.Review of state-space representation of systems 2. Introduction to Optimization- Unconstrained and constrained optimization, Karush-Kuhn-Tucker (KKT) conditions 3. Calculus of variations-Examples of variational problems, Brachistochrone, Catenary etc., Cost functionals, extremals, Weak and strong extrema, First-order necessary conditions for weak extrema--Euler-Lagrange equations, Hamiltonian formalism and mechanics, Variational problems with constraints, Second-order conditions-Legendre's condition, Weierstrass-Erdmann corner conditions, Weierstrass excess function 4. Optimal control problem formulations- Variational approach to the fixed-time, free-endpoint problem 5. Pontryagin maximum principle- Proof of the maximum principle, Time-optimal control of double integrator, Bang-bang control 6. Hamiltonian-Jacobi Bellman (HJB) equation-principle of optimality, Sufficient condition for optimality 7. Linear quadratic regulator (LQR) problem- candidate optimal feedback law, Riccati differential equation, proof of sufficiency using HJB equation 8. Numerical methods for optimal control problems- Evaluation of parameter-dependent functionals and their gradients, Indirect methods, Direct methods, 9. Applications- Time-optimal control of linear systems, Singular control, Optimal control to target curves Text Books : 1. Pinch Enid R., ``Optimal Control and the Calculus of Variations", Oxford University Press, 1995 2. Daniel Liberzon, ``Calculus of Variations and Optimal Control Theory -- A concise introduction", Princeton University Press, 2012 Reference Books : 1. Mike Mesterton- Gibbons, ``A Primer on The Calculus of Variations and Optimal Control Theory"--American Mathematical Society, First Indian Edition 2012 | 12 | 3 - 1 - 0 - 0 - 8 - 0 |

166 | EE6415 | Nonlinear Control Systems Course No : EE6415Course Title : Nonlinear Control SystemsPre Requisite : Basic Course in Control with preferably a course on Linear Systems or Linear AlgebraExtended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 6Total Hours PerWeek : 9Description : This course presents mathematical tools for analysis and control of nonlinear systems, with emphasis on Lyapunov methods. Course Content : 1. Mathematical preliminaries: Open and closed sets, compact set, dense set, Continuity of functions, Lipschitz condition, smooth functions, Vector space, norm of a vector, normed linear space, inner product space. 2. We will begin with an introduction to simple nonlinear system examples. The notion of equilibrium points and operating points will help us to extract linearized models based on Jacobian linearization. 3. Second-order nonlinear systems occupy a special place in the study of non-linear systems since they are easy to interpret geometrically in the plane. Here, we will touch upon the concept of a vector field, trajectories, vector field plot, phase-plane portrait and positively invariant sets. The classification of equilibrium points based on the eigenvalues of the linearized system will also be introduced and we will see why the analysis based on linearization fails in some cases. Periodic solutions and the notion of limit cycles will lead us to the Bendixson’s theorem and Poincare -Bendixson criteria that provide sufficient conditions to rule-out and rule-in the existence of limit cycles respectively for a second-order system. We will end this discussion with two methods for obtaining approximate solutions of periodic solutions. 4. Stability notions: Stability is central to control system design and here we will study various notions of stability such as Lagrange stability, Lyapunov stability, asymptotic stability, global asymptotic stability, exponential stability, relative stability and instability. The tools that we will use to infer the stability properties include Lyapunov’s direct and indirect method, La Salle’s invariance property and singular perturbations. We will also explore tools such as Sum of Squares for construction of Lyapunov functions. 5. Design methods: Finally, we will see the design of control laws based on Lyapunov function and Sliding mode control and illustrate the methodology on a few benchmark examples. Text Books : Nonlinear Systems (3rd Ed.), Hassan K. Khalil, Pearson Education. Reference Books : Nonlinear System Analysis - Analysis, Stability and Control, Shankar Sastry, Springer. Nonlinear System Analysis - M. Vidyasagar. | 9 | 3 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 6 - 9 |

167 | EE6417 | Allied Topics in Control Systems Course No : EE6417Course Title : Allied Topics in Control SystemsPre Requisite : EE5413 and EE5110Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 6Total Hours PerWeek : 9Description : (1) Develop understanding of stochastic modeling in control systems. (2) Develop familiarity with stochastic calculus, filtering techniques and optimal feedback control. Course Content : 1. Recap of probability and linear system theory. 2. Stochastic processes -- Poisson counters and Brownian motion. 3. Stochastic differential equations -- Ito and Stratonovich integrals, Fokker-Plank equation, Langevin equation, Ornstein–Uhlenbeck process. 4. Filtering – Riccati equations, Kalman filter in continuous and discrete time, Extended Kalman filter 5. Stochastic optimal control -- Dynamic programming, Hamilton–Jacobi–Bellman (HJB) equation, Linear quadratic Gaussian control, Linear exponential Gaussian control. Text Books : 1. Introduction to Stochastic Control Theory by Karl Johan Astrom (Dover edition, 2006) 2. Notes on Stochastic Control by Roger W. Brockett (2009) (available online) 3. J. L. Speyer and W. H. Chung, Stochastic Processes, Estimation and Control, SIAM, 2008. 4. Dynamic Programming and Optimal Control vol. I by Dimitri Bertsekas (Athena 2017) Reference Books : 1. P. R. Kumar and P. Varaiya, Stochastic Systems: Estimation, Identification, and Adaptive Control, Prentice Hall, 1986. 2. D. Roy and G.V.Rao, Stochastic Dynamics, Filtering and Optimization, Cambridge University Press, 2016. 3. B. Oeksendal, Stochastic differential equations: an introduction with applications, Springer, 2003. 4. W. H. Fleming and R.W. Rishel, Deterministic and Stochastic Optimal Control, Springer, 1975. | 9 | 3 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 6 - 9 |

168 | EE6418 | Dynamic Games: Theory and Applications Course No : EE6418Course Title : Dynamic Games: Theory and ApplicationsPre Requisite : Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 6Total Hours PerWeek : 0Description : 1. Introduce different concepts of game theory and their potential applicability in engineering. 2. Provide necessary background to access the ever growing game theory literature in engineering applications. 3. Provide to the students an opportunity to develop a research project in his/her field of interest. Course Content : 1. Non-cooperative games (static): Nash equilibrium and subsequent refinements 2. Cooperative games (static): Core, Shapley value 3. Brief review of optimal control and dynamic programming 4. Dynamic non-cooperative games: Information structures; open-loop, closed-loop and feedback Nash equilibrium; recent developments such as mean-field games 5. Dynamic cooperative games: time consistency and dynamic allocation mechanisms 6. If time permits we can explore pursuit-evasion games, network games, evolutionary games and related dynamics Text Books : No definite textbook. Lecture notes will be provided. Reference Books : Static games: 1. Game theory, MIT Press, D. Fudenberg and J. Tirole 1991 (Indian version is available from Ane Books Pvt. Ltd) 2. Game theory: A Multi-leveled Approach, Springer-Verlag, H. Peters, 2008 Dynamic games: 1. Dynamic Non-cooperative Game Theory: SIAM Classics in Applied Mathematics, Tamer Basar, Geert Jan Olsder. 1999 2. LQ Dynamic Optimization and Differential Games, John Wiley & Sons, J. C. Engwerda, 2005 3. Differential Games: A Mathematical Theory with Applications to Warfare and Pursuit, Control and Optimization, Dover Publications, Rufus Isaacs, 1999 4. Games and Dynamic Games, World Scientific Publishing Company, A. Haurie, J. B. Krawczyk, G. Zaccour, 2012 Applications: 1. Game Theory with Engineering Applications: SIAM Advances in Design and Control. Dario Bauso 2016 | 9 | 3 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 6 - 0 |

169 | EE6419 | Geometric Nonlinear Control Theory Course No : EE6419Course Title : Geometric Nonlinear Control TheoryPre Requisite : Basic Control CourseExtended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 6Total Hours PerWeek : 9Description : This course provides an introduction to the use of differential geometric techniques in nonlinear system and control theory. The intrinsic difficulties of the control of nonlinear systems, as well as the effectiveness of this newly developed mathematical theory, will be illustrated throughout the course by some apparently simple and physically well-motivated examples, for instance from the area of robotic manipulators and mobile robots Course Content : Introduction. What is a nonlinear system? Characteristic examples. Limitations of linearization. Nonlinear input-output maps. Mathematical Preliminaries: Vector spaces, Functions on Euclidean spaces, Differentiation, Manifolds, Tangent spaces, vector fields. Controllability and observability. Lie brackets; rank conditions, relations with controllability and observability of linearized systems, examples. State space transformations and feedback. State feedback, feedback linearization, computed torque control of robot manipulators, observer design, and examples. Stability and stabilization. Stabilization and linearization, stabilization of non-controllable critical eigenvalues, zero dynamics and decoupling problems with stability, passivity-based control, discontinuous feedback, examples. Text Books : Calculus on Manifolds, Michael Spivak, 1965. (for mathematical preliminaries) Nonlinear Dynamical Control Systems, by H. Nijmeijer and A.J. van der Schaft, Springer Verlag, New York, 1990 (fourth printing 1999). Reference Books : A comprehensive introduction to Differential Geometry, vol 1, Michael Spivak, Publish or Perish, 1979. Nonlinear Control Systems, Alberto Isidori, Springer, 1995. Modern Control Engineering, Katsuhiko Ogata, Chapter 11, Prentice Hall India, 2004. (For basics in linear state space methods) Online lectures by Prof. Gilbert Stang, for basics in Linear Algebra. | 9 | 3 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 6 - 9 |

170 | EE6430 | Fundamentals of Linear Optimization Course No : EE6430Course Title : Fundamentals of Linear OptimizationPre Requisite : Linear AlgebraExtended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 6Total Hours PerWeek : 9Description : To teach the students the geometry of linear optimization. At the end of course the students would have a good understanding of polyhedral objects and perform computations on them. Course Content : 1. Origins of Linear Optimization: Fourier-Motzkin Elimination 2. Affine Spaces: Affine Hull, Affine Subspaces, Affine Independence and Dimension 3. Convex Cones: Polyhedral Cones, Finitely Generated Cones, Carathoedery’s Theorem Wely’s Theorem, Farkas Lemma, Dual Cones and Minkowski’s thorem . 4. Polyhedrons: Faces of Cones and Polyhedrons, Homogenization, Minkowski-Weyl Duality, V-H descriptions, Recession cone . 5. Linear Programming and Duality: Feasibility, Dual of an LP, Weak and Strong Duality theorems and Complementary Slackness theorem. 6. Computations on a Polyhedron: Dimension of a polyhedron and Double description method and Simplex Algorithm Text Books : 1. Undergraduate Convexity: From Fourier-Motzkin to Kuhn-Tucker, Niels Lauritzen, World Scientific Press. 2. Polyhedral Geometry and Linear Optimization: Andreas Paffenholtz (Lecture Notes Available in Web Reference Books : Understanding and Using Linear Programming, Matousek and Gartner, Springer. | 9 | 3 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 6 - 9 |

171 | EE6431 | Nonsmooth analysis in control and optimization Course No : EE6431Course Title : Nonsmooth analysis in control and optimizationPre Requisite : Control Engineering or equivalentExtended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 6Total Hours PerWeek : 9Description : Course motivation: Nonsmooth problems arise naturally in many fields of applications such as rigid bodies subjected to set-valued force laws, nonsmooth harmonic oscillator and circuits with nonlinear elements. In feedback control, they occur by design while dealing with sliding-mode, optimal control, switched or hybrid systems and in continuous-time optimization algorithms by way of nonsmooth cost function and constraints. The resulting dynamics manifest as differential equations with discontinuous vector field. Analysis, optimization and stabilization of such systems require tools from nonsmooth analysis involving set-valued functions, generalized derivatives, convex analysis etc. Course Objective: Expose the students to various applications involving nonsmooth dynamics and equip them with various tools to perform nonsmooth analysis. Course Content : 1. Applications: Nonsmooth harmonic oscillator, stick-slip system and systems involving discontinuous stabilizing control law 2. Semicontinuity, proper and improper convex functions, Lipschitz property of convex function, projection of a point onto a set, distance function, gradient of the distance function and the projection inequality, normal and tangent cones, properties of normal cones 3. Subdifferential of a convex function and its properties, connection to convex geometry, basic inequality, subgradient calculus and optimality conditions. 4. Directional derivatives, relation between subgradients and directional derivatives, existence of subgradient, subdifferential and gradient direction of steepest descent, examples involving the subgradient of a norm, distance function, indicator function, max function and maximum eigen value of a symmetric matrix. 5. Solution notions for discontinuous systems, Caratheodory, Fillipov, sample-and-hold solutions. 6. Lyapunov-like stability theorems for nonsmooth systems and optimality conditions for nonsmooth optimization. Text Books : 1. Nonlinear Optimization by Andrzej Ruszczynski, Princeton University Press, 2006. 2. Nonsmooth analysis and control theory: F. H. Clarke, Yu. S. Ledyaev, R. J. Stern and P.R. Wolenski, Springer, 1998. 3. Hybrid dynamical systems: Modeling, stability and robustness by Rafal Goebel, Ricardo G. Sanfelice and Andrew Teel, Princeton University Press, 2012. Reference Books : 1. Discontinuous dynamical systems: A tutorial on solutions, nonsmooth analysis and stability by Jorge Cortes, IEEE Control System Magazine, June 2008. 2. An easy path to convex analysis and applications by Boris S. Mordukhovich and Nguyen Mau Nam, Morgan and Claypool Publisher, 2014. 3. Nonsmooth analysis and control theory: F. H. Clarke, Yu. S. Ledyaev, R. J. Stern and P.R. Wolenski, Springer, 1998. | 9 | 3 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 6 - 9 |

172 | EE6432 | Stochastic Control Course No : EE6432Course Title : Stochastic ControlPre Requisite : EE5413 and EE5110Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 8Total Hours PerWeek : 12Description : (1) Develop understanding of stochastic modeling in control systems. (2) Develop familiarity with stochastic calculus, filtering techniques and optimal feedback control. Course Content : 1. Recap of probability theory: Probability spaces, Random variables, Convergence of random variables, Conditional expectation, Filtrations 2. Recap of linear systems theory: Controllability, Observability, Kalman decomposition, Stability 3. Stochastic processes: Classification of stochastic processes, Second order processes, Mean-Square calculus, Random walk and Brownian motion, Properties of Brownian motion, White noise 4. Stochastic differential equations: Differential equations driven by white noise, Riemann-Stieltjes integral, Wiener integral, Ito and Stratonovich integrals, Fokker-Planck equation, Langevin equation, Ornstein–Uhlenbeck process. 5. Estimation and Filtering: Linear least squares estimator, Kalman filter in continuous and discrete time, Separation principle, Certainty equivalence 6. Stochastic optimal control -- Dynamic programming, Hamilton–Jacobi–Bellman (HJB) equation, Linear quadratic Gaussian control, Linear exponential Gaussian control, Stochastic maximum principle Text Books : (Lecture notes and reading material will be provided) 1. J. L. Speyer and W. H. Chung, Stochastic Processes, Estimation and Control, SIAM, 2008. 2. D. Bertsekas, Dynamic Programming and Optimal Control vol. I, Athena, 2017. 3. A. H. Jazwinski, Stochastic Processes and Filtering Theory, Dover, 2007 Reference Books : 1. K. J. Astrom, Introduction to Stochastic Control Theory, Dover, 2006. 2. J. Yong and X.Y. Zhou, Stochastic Controls: Hamiltonian Systems and HJB equations, Springer, 1999. 3. B. Oeksendal, Stochastic differential equations: an introduction with applications, Springer, 2003. 4. W. H. Fleming and R.W. Rishel, Deterministic and Stochastic Optimal Control, Springer, 1975. | 12 | 3 - 1 - 0 - 0 - 8 - 12 |

173 | EE6433 | Distributed Optimization for Control Course No : EE6433Course Title : Distributed Optimization for ControlPre Requisite : EE5121 or CS5020Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 8Total Hours PerWeek : 12Description : 1. To provide an overview of various distributed optimization algorithms and a few applications. 2. Analyze the basic algorithms theoretically and review few recent research advancements. Course Content : 1. Preliminaries: Graph theory, consensus protocol, convex analysis, convergence analysis, Lyapunov functions 2. Distributed algorithms: Unconstrained algorithms: Distributed sub-gradient, Decentralized inexact gradient tracking, Exact first order algorithm (EXTRA), Push-sum, Push-pull Constrained algorithms: Dual averaging, Dual ascent, Alternating Direction Method of Multipliers (ADMM) 3. With network constraints: Time varying networks, Directed networks, Event-triggered, Resilient optimization, Online optimization 4. Applications in Control: Estimation problem, Power system control, Model predictive control, Coordination of autonomous agents, Rate control of communication networks Text Books : There are no textbooks. Reference Books : Following are some survey papers and tutorials. Precise references would be provided during the course for each lecture. 1. T. Yang et. al., A survey of distributed optimization, Annual Reviews in Control, Vol 47, pp 278305, 2019 2. A. Nedic and J. Liu, Distributed optimization for control, Annual Review of Control, Robotics, and Autonomous Systems, Vol 1,pp 77-103, 2018 3. Boyd S, et al., Distributed optimization and statistical learning via the alternating direction method of multipliers. Found Trends Mach Learn, pp 1–122, 2010 4. A. Nedic, Converegence rate of distributed averaging dynamics and optimization in networks, Foundation and Trends in Systems and Control, Vol 2, pp 1-100, 2015 5. G. Notarstefano et al., Distributed optimization for smart cyber-physical networks, Foundations and Trends in Systems and Control Series, Vol 19, 2019. 6. Hazan, Elad. Introduction to online convex optimization, arXiv preprint arXiv:1909.05207 (2019). 7. D. Bertsekas and J. Tsitsiklis, Parallel and distributed computation: Numerical methods, Vol. 23. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice hall, 1989. | 12 | 3 - 1 - 0 - 0 - 8 - 12 |

174 | EE6470 | Optical Signal Processing Course No : EE6470Course Title : Optical Signal ProcessingPre Requisite : Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 6Total Hours PerWeek : 0Description : To be upload Course Content : To be upload Text Books : To be upload Reference Books : To be upload | 9 | 3 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 6 - 0 |

175 | EE6491 | Advanced Topics in Instrumention Course No : EE6491Course Title : Advanced Topics in InstrumentionPre Requisite : Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 6Total Hours PerWeek : 9Description : To teach students recent research and technology advances in the area that are of current interest. Course Content : To be decided. Text Books : To be decided. Reference Books : To be decided. | 9 | 3 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 6 - 9 |

176 | EE6492 | Advanced Topics in Instrumentation Course No : EE6492Course Title : Advanced Topics in InstrumentationPre Requisite : Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 6Total Hours PerWeek : 9Description : To teach students recent research and technology advances in the area that are of current interest. Course Content : NIL Text Books : NIL Reference Books : NIL | 9 | 3 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 6 - 9 |

177 | EE6493 | GIAN 151003D02: Advanced Topics in Instrumentation Course No : EE6493Course Title : GIAN 151003D02: Advanced Topics in InstrumentationPre Requisite : Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 4Total Hours PerWeek : 6Description : Objectives of the course include, (a) to provide an overview of the importance of environmental monitoring, (b) to develop necessary skill-set to select appropriate sensors and develop the associated signal conditioning to monitor important environmental parameters, (c) to train the students/engineers on the best methods to transmit, store and analyse and interpret the data from the sensors, and (d) to provide a hands-on experience in electronic system design concept, in the point of view of environmental monitoring. Course Content : Importance of environmental monitoring, climate change issues and parameters to be sensed and monitored, sensors, measurement methods, interfacing electronic circuit design, communication protocols, standards, installation and maintenance issues, energy sources for sensing and communication, ethical issues, data analysis and interpretation, system design concept. Text Books : Henry Leung and Subhas C. M., 'Intelligent Environmental Sensing', Springer International Publishing AG Switzerland, 2015. ISBN: 978 3 319 12891 7 Reference Books : Subhas M. C., "Intelligent Sensing, Instrumentation and Measurements", Springer-Verlag Berlin Heidelberg 2013. ISBN: 978 3 642 37026 7 | 6 | 2 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 4 - 6 |

178 | EE6499 | Advanced Topics in Control Systems Technology Course No : EE6499Course Title : Advanced Topics in Control Systems TechnologyPre Requisite : COTExtended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 6Total Hours PerWeek : 9Description : To teach students recent research and technology advances in the area that are of current interest. Course Content : To be decided based on topical areas of interest. Text Books : To be decided based on topical areas of interest. Reference Books : To be decided based on topical areas of interest. | 9 | 3 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 6 - 9 |

179 | EE6500 | Integrated Optoelectronics Devices and Circuits Course No : EE6500Course Title : Integrated Optoelectronics Devices and CircuitsPre Requisite : Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 8Total Hours PerWeek : 12Description : In this course, students will learn background theory, working principle, technology of various integrated optoelectronic devices and circuits for optical interconnect applications. It is mainly designed for postgraduate students studying in various streams like Microelectronics, Communication Systems, Photonics and Optical Engineering. However, undergraduate students can also take this course after completing basic courses covering EM Fields and Semiconductor Devices. Course Content : (i) Introduction: Generic Optical Systems and Fundamental Building Blocks; (ii) Basics of Semiconductor Optoelectronics: Elemental and Compound Semiconductors; (iii) Electronic Properties and Optical Processes in Semiconductors; (iv) P-N Junction Theory, LEDs and Photodetectors; (v) Heterostructures, Confinement of Electron Waves, Optical Waveguides and Guided Modes; (vi) Semiconductor Optical Amplifiers and Fabry-Perot Lasers; (vii) Coupled Mode Theory, DBR and DFB Lasers; (viii) Silicon Photonics: Integrated Optical Passive and Active Components; (ix) Tunable Filters, Delay-Lines and Switching Circuits in SOI Platform; (x) CMOS Technology: Electrical vs. Optical Interconnects Text Books : Photonics - Optical Electronics in Modern Communications Author(s): A. Yariv and P. Yeh (Oxford University Press) Reference Books : 1. Semiconductor Optoelectronic Devices Author(s): Pallab Bhattacharya (Pearson Education Inc.) 2. Silicon Photonics - Fundamentals and Devices Author(s): M. Jamal Deen and P.K. Basu (John Wiley & Sons Ltd.) | 12 | 4 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 8 - 12 |

180 | EE6501 | Optical Sensors Course No : EE6501Course Title : Optical SensorsPre Requisite : Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 6Total Hours PerWeek : 0Description : Optical Sensors is intended as a graduate level course that introduces the different types of optical sensor technologies and their applications in metrology, navigation, structural health monitoring. Course Content : Introduction: Optics for differential sensing of temperature, humidity and pressure; detection of bio-molecules, gases and chemicals; measurements of displacement, vibration and thickness of transparent thin-films; inertial navigation – position, velocity, acceleration, and rotational sensing; structural health monitoring; scanning and infrared imaging, etc. Principle of Optical Sensing: Fluorescence & Absorption Spectroscopy, Polarization/Amplitude/Intensity Modulation, Cavity Resonances & Sagnac Effect, Distributed Scattering Effects (Bragg, Raman & Brillouin). Integrated Optical Sensing Elements & Accessories: Dielectric and Plasmonic Waveguides, Microbridge / Suspended Waveguide and Waveguide cantilever, Passive and Active Phase Shifters, Quantum Dot Photodetectors, Dielectric Mirror & Antireflection Coating, Membrane / Diaphragm, Microfluidic Channels, and Micropumps. Integrated Optical Multi-Functional Sensor Devices: Surface Plasmon Polariton Resonators, Vertical and In-Plane Fabry-Perot Interferometer, Mach-Zehnder Interferometers, Coupled Microring Resonator(s), Lab-on-Chip. Application Specific Optical Sensor Systems: Integrated Fiber Optic Gyro (IFOG), Optical Time Domain Reflectometer (OTDR), Light Detection and Ranging (LIDAR), Optical Scanners, IR Camera and Photodetector Array. Text Books : John Dakin and Brain Culshaw, “Optical Fiber Sensors”, Artech House, 1997.Joerg Haus, “Optical Sensors: Basics & Applications”, Wiley-VCH, 2010 Reference Books : K.T.V. Grattan and B.T. Megitt, “Optical Fiber Sensor Technology”, Kluwer Academic Publishers, 1999.Francis T.S. Yu, Shizhou Yin, Paul B. Ruffin, “Fiber Optic Sensors”, 2/e, CRC Press, 2008.Masood Tabib-Azar, “Integrated Optics, Microstructures and Sensors”, Kluwer Academic Publishers. | 9 | 3 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 6 - 0 |

181 | EE6502 | Optical Signal Processing and Quantum Communication Course No : EE6502Course Title : Optical Signal Processing and Quantum CommunicationPre Requisite : Basic course on EM/Photonics/Fiber Optics Communication TechnologyExtended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 6Total Hours PerWeek : 9Description : To introduce the basic principles required for the understanding of linear and nonlinear optical signal processing techniques. To apply these principles for specific optical signal processing applications, such as all-optical switching, wavelength conversion, and logic gates, for applications in optical communication systems. These ideas are then extended to quantum information processing with the introduction of entangled photons, qubits and cluster states and their use in photonic quantum computing and in quantum communications Course Content : Part1: Linear and nonlinear optical effects such as the Pockels and Kerr effects, their use in devices such as electro-optic modulators for intensity and phase modulation. Higher order nonlinear effects in crystals and in optical fibres, with their applications to self phase modulation, cross phase modulation and 4-wave mixing. Numerical solutions to the nonlinar Schrodinger equation, application of the nonlinar optical loop mirror and nonlinear effects in semiconductor optical amplifiers. Part 2: Optical quantum information processing starting with the descriptions of Fock states, the weak coherent states and the cluster states, and the methods for their generation and detection. The use of qubits in optical communications for implementation of quantum key distribution, quantum communication, quantum teleportation. The description of different technologies leading to their use in quantum memory and quantum repeaters Text Books : Photonics – Yariv, 2006 Optical Quantum Information Processing, P. Kok and B. W. Lovett, 2010 Reference Books : Optical Electronics, Ghatak and Thyagarajan, 1990 Nonlinear fiber optics; Applications of nonlinear fiber optics, GP Agrawal, 2012 Quantum Optics: M. Orszag, 2007 Relevant Journal Publications will be shared during the course | 9 | 3 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 6 - 9 |

182 | EE6504 | Optical Communication Networks Course No : EE6504Course Title : Optical Communication NetworksPre Requisite : Either EE5153 FON or EE5504 FOCT Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 6Total Hours PerWeek : 9Description : Optical Communication Networks is intended as a graduate advanced level course in optical networks. This course would serve students specializing in “Photonics, Optical Communications and RF”, (MTech EE5 stream) who intend to appreciate the communication application of photonics as well as communication (MTech EE1 stream) students. The course is structured to include the latest trends in optical networks which would directly cater to industry. Course Content : Review of Optical Networking Basics: Optical communication link, evolution of optical networks, SDH networks, broadcast & select networks, WDM networks. (2 weeks) WDM Optical Networks: Wavelength continuity constraint, optical pass-through, light-path, Routing and Wavelength Assignment (RWA) problem, familiar algorithms and performance analysis. (2 weeks) Optical Network Elements: Optical Line Terminals (OLTs), OADMs, OXCs, passive optical routers, dynamic and flexible optical networking, reconfigurability, ROADMs, optical switch types, photonic integrated circuits from network perspective – photonic interconnects and switches. (3 weeks) Elements of All-Optical Packet Switching: Optical Burst Switching (OBS): JET, JIT protocols, contention resolution algorithms. (2 weeks) Multiplexing, Grooming Routing and Mesh Protection in Optical Networks: End-to-end multiplexing of optical payloads, basic ideas and role of grooming in optical networks – grooming node architecture, selection of grooming sites, trade-offs and strategies. Shortest path algorithms & multipath routing. Mesh protection in WDM networks. (2 weeks) Latest Trends in Optical Networking: Elements of dynamic and flexible (elastic) optical networking. Passive Optical Network (PoN) TDM-PoN, WDM-PoN. PoN solution to Wireless fronthaul / backhaul, CPRI / OBSAI formats, Open simulation tools like NS3, Omnet++ (2 weeks). Text Books : 1. Rajiv Ramaswamy, Kumar N. Sivarajan and Galen Sasaki, “Optical Networks - A Practical Perspective”, Morgan and Kaufmann, NY. 3 e, 2008. 2. . Tutorial / Review type articles from IEEE journals / magazines Reference Books : 1. Bernstein, G., Rajagopalan, B. and Saha, D., 2003. Optical network control: architecture, protocols, and standards. Addison-Wesley Longman Publishing Co., Inc.. 2. Kachris, C., Bergman, K. and Tomkos, I. eds., 2012. Optical interconnects for future data center networks. Springer Science & Business Media. 3. Sivalingam, K.M. and Subramaniam, S. eds., 2000. Optical WDM networks: Principles and practice (Vol. 554). Springer Science & Business Media. 4. Dutta, R., Kamal, A.E. and Rouskas, G.N. eds., 2008. Traffic grooming for optical networks: foundations, techniques and frontiers. Springer Science & Business Media. 5. Simmons, J.M., 2014. Optical network design and planning. Springer. 6. Chapter 12 in R Hui, Introduction to Fiber-Optic Communications (1e), Elsevier, 2019 7. Devi Chadha, “Optical WDM Networks: From Static to Elastic Networks”, Wiley, 2019 | 9 | 3 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 6 - 9 |

183 | EE6505 | Waveguides, Microwave Circuits, and Antennas Course No : EE6505Course Title : Waveguides, Microwave Circuits, and AntennasPre Requisite : EE5505,EE2025Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 8Total Hours PerWeek : 12Description : A follow up course to EE5505 (or EE2025 for UGs) that teaches students more advanced topics in waveguides, antennas, RF filters and microwave engineering. A graduate level course, it is kept open to advanced undergraduates. Course Content : Review: Maxwell’s Equations, Poynting Theorem, Group and Phase velocity. Transmission Lines. Plane Waves: Cutoffs and reflections in ionosphere. Anisotropic media: Faraday Rotation. Thin films. Introduction to optical filter design. Waveguides: Rectangular and cylindrical waveguides. Dielectric and Surface waveguides. Microwave Networks: Microwave cavities. Scattering matrix, S parameters, reciprocity, coupling energy to a waveguide. Use of Vector Network Analyser to characterise high-speed circuits. Microwave components: Gunn, impatt and varacter diodes, etc and their use in designing RF circuits. Active and passive RF filters. Antennas: Potential functions. Monopole and dipole antennas, Antenna arrays. Yagi, Horn, Parabola, micro strip and patch antennas. Antenna equivalent circuits, Antenna directivity, Gain and Coupling, Impedance, Radiation patterns. Case Studies of RF circuits in mobile phones and satellite communications. Optional Additional Topics: Waveguide couplers, practical RF circuit design, gratings, holography. Non-recoprocal elements such as ferrite components, Isolators and circulators. Frequency-independent antennas, log-periodic antennas, spiral antennas. RF-Id systems. Text Books : 1. Ramo, Whinnery and Van Duzer, “Fields and Waves in Communication Electronics, 3rd Ed.” John Wiley and Sons (Asia) Pvt. Ltd., 2002. 2. R Ludwig and P Bretchko, RF Circuit Design: Theory and Applications, Pearson Education, 2000. Reference Books : 1. J.D. Jackson, “Classical Electrodynamics,” Wiley Eastern Pvt. Ltd. | 12 | 4 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 8 - 12 |

184 | EE6506 | Computational Electrogmagnetics Course No : EE6506Course Title : Computational ElectrogmagneticsPre Requisite : Engineering ElectromagneticsExtended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 8Total Hours PerWeek : 12Description : 1. To learn advanced concepts in electromagnetism 2. To solve Maxwell's equations in arbitrary geometries and structures by numerical methods. Course Content : Solution of ODEs, Solution of elliptic PDEs - Poisson's Equation, Review of Electromagnetic Theory - including uniqueness and reciprocity, advanced concepts in EM - the scattering problem and the electric field integral equation, solution of hyperbolic PDEs - wave equation, integral equation methods and the method of moments (MoM), finite difference time domain method (FDTD), frequency domain finite element methods (FEM), geometric theory of diffraction (GTD), frequency domain eigen solutions of Maxwell's equations for periodic structures, numerical methods of solving matrix equations Text Books : Computational Methods for Electromagnetics - Peterson, Ray, Mitra Reference Books : 1. Numerical Recipes in C++, Pres et al, 2. Advanced Engineering Electromagnetics - C A Balanis, 3. Introduction to the FDTD for Electromagnetics - Gedney, 4. Integral Equation Methods for Electromagnetic and Elastic Waves - Chew, Tong, Hu, 5. Finite Element Method for Electromagnetics: Antennas, Microwave Circuits, and Scattering Applications - Volakis, Chatterjee, and Kempel | 12 | 4 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 8 - 12 |

185 | EE6509 | Fiber Lasers and Applications Course No : EE6509Course Title : Fiber Lasers and ApplicationsPre Requisite : Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 4Total Hours PerWeek : 0Description : This course is intended to cover the fundamental aspects of fiber lasers, their design considerations for CW and pulsed operations, as well as advanced topics such as power scaling and reliability issues. At the end of the course, the participant will be able to • Explain the physical processes involved in CW and pulsed fiber lasers • Design fiber amplifiers/lasers, subject to relevant constraints • Solve issues related to power scaling, reliability, and other application-specific issues. Course Content : I. Fundamentals of Fiber Amplifiers 1. Stimulated emission and amplification of light 2. Rare-earth doped fiber systems (Er and Yb) 3. Three-level and four-level systems 4. Population inversion and gain 5. Basic configuration of a fiber amplifier II. Fiber laser characteristics 1. Resonators, fiber resonators 2. Threshold and slope efficiency 3. Gain bandwidth and tunability 4. Case Study – EDFL and YDFL 5. Pulsed fiber lasers – mode-locking and Q-switching III. Power Scaling of Fiber Lasers 1. Double-clad fiber technology 2. Design considerations for double-clad fiber lasers 3. Power limitation due to nonlinearities/thermal mode instability 4. Mitigation techniques 5. Chirped pulse amplification of ultrashort pulses 6. Beam combining techniques IV. Applications of Fiber Lasers 1. Healthcare 2. Material Processing Text Books : 1. Fundamentals of Photonics- Saleh and Teich, 2nd Edition, Wiley 2. Laser Fundamentals, William T. Silfvast, Cambridge University Press 3. Lasers, A.E. Seigman, University Science Books Reference Books : 1. Rare-earth-doped fiber lasers and amplifiers, Michel J. F. Digonnet, Marcel Dekker Inc. 2. Erbium doped fiber amplifiers: Fundamentals and technology, P.C. Becker, N. A. Olsson, J. R. Simpson, Academic Press. | 6 | 2 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 4 - 0 |

186 | EE6511 | Distributed Fiber Sensors and its Applications Course No : EE6511Course Title : Distributed Fiber Sensors and its ApplicationsPre Requisite : Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 4Total Hours PerWeek : 0Description : This course is intended for early stage researchers and research scholars interested in the area of distributed fiber sensors. The following are the objectives of this course. • Understand the fundamentals of distributed fiber sensors • Develop the ability to design distributed fiber optic sensing system • Learn basic issues such as dynamic range, spatial resolution, and dynamic sensing • Study advanced concepts such as pulse coding and correlation-based interactions. Course Content : I. Fundamentals of Fiber optics 1. Modes in optical fiber, attenuation and dispersion 2. Optical sources and receivers – noise analysis II. Optical fiber sensors 1. Typical configuration 2. Amplitude/Phase/Wavelength/Polarization modulated sensors III. Distributed fiber sensors (3 sessions – Balaji Srinivasan) 1. Fundamentals of OTDR/OFDR 2. SNR improvement IV. Distributed sensing mechanisms (3 sessions – Luc Thevenaz) 1. Elastic/inelastic scattering – Rayleigh, Raman and Brillouin 2. Strain/temperature sensitivity V. Advanced concepts 1. Specific case studies 2. Long range sensing using BOTDA 3. Key issues for increasing number of measuring points 4. High spatial resolution sensing using BOCDA 5. Limitations and mitigating configurations VI. Applications and Future Prospects Text Books : 1. “Fiber Optic Communication Systems”, G. P. Agrawal, Wiley. 2. "Advanced Fiber Optics”, Luc Thevenaz, Chapter 9, EPFL Press. Reference Books : “Optical Fiber Sensors: Advanced Techniques and Applications”, Ginu Rajan, Chapter 12, CRC Press. | 6 | 2 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 4 - 0 |

187 | EE6700 | Advanced Photonics Laboratory Course No : EE6700Course Title : Advanced Photonics LaboratoryPre Requisite : Introductory course in optics/photonicsExtended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 0Total Hours PerWeek : 3Description : This is an advanced laboratory course that follows the theory courses EE5500 (Intro to Photonics) orPH5110 (Optics and Photonics). The course is designed as a practicuum, where advanced concepts inphotonics are introduced to students through a series of specific experiments. It is meant only for students whose project work will be experimental. New experiments will be added periodically. Course Content : An outline of the different experiments is as follows:1. Designing an LED transceiver circuit 2. Fiber ring laser - Construction and Characterization 3. Study of Four wave mixing in a non-linear fiber 4. Temperature sensing using Raman Scattering 5. Low Coherence Interferometry6. Polarization Microscopy and Verification of the Malus law 7. Coherence length and Linewidth measurement of a Laser 8. Characterization of spectral response of Fiber Bragg Grating Text Books : Laboratory manuals provided by the instructor Reference Books : Any basic book on optics/photonics. | 9 | 0 - 0 - 3 - 0 - 0 - 3 |

188 | EE6901 | M.Tech Project 1 Course No : EE6901Course Title : M.Tech Project 1Pre Requisite : Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 25Total Hours PerWeek : 25Description : This is a part of the M.Tech Project to be done in Summer (after 8th semester by Dual Degree students and after 2nd semester by M.Tech students). Course Content : Project Work Text Books : Not Applicable Reference Books : Not Applicable | 25 | 0 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 25 - 25 |

189 | EE6901W | M.Tech Project 1 Course No : EE6901WCourse Title : M.Tech Project 1Pre Requisite : Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 25Total Hours PerWeek : 25Description : This is a part of the M.Tech Project to be done in Summer (after 8th semester by Dual Degree students and after 2nd semester by M.Tech students). Course Content : Project Work Text Books : Not Applicable Reference Books : Not Applicable | 25 | 0 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 25 - 25 |

190 | EE6902 | M.Tech Project 2 Course No : EE6902Course Title : M.Tech Project 2Pre Requisite : Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 30Total Hours PerWeek : 30Description : This is a part of the M.Tech Project to be done in the 9th semester by Dual Degree students and in the 3rd semester by M.Tech students. Course Content : Project Work Text Books : Not Applicable Reference Books : Not Applicable | 30 | 0 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 30 - 30 |

191 | EE6902W | M.Tech Project 2 Course No : EE6902WCourse Title : M.Tech Project 2Pre Requisite : Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 30Total Hours PerWeek : 30Description : This is a part of the M.Tech Project to be done in the 9th semester by Dual Degree students and in the 3rd semester by M.Tech students. Course Content : Project Work Text Books : Not Applicable Reference Books : Not Applicable | 30 | 0 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 30 - 30 |

192 | EE6903 | M.Tech Project 3 Course No : EE6903Course Title : M.Tech Project 3Pre Requisite : Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 30Total Hours PerWeek : 30Description : This is a part of the M.Tech Project to be done in the 10th semester by Dual Degree students and in the 4th semester by M.Tech students. Course Content : Project Work Text Books : Not Applicable Reference Books : Not Applicable | 30 | 0 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 30 - 30 |

193 | EE6903W | M.Tech Project 3 Course No : EE6903WCourse Title : M.Tech Project 3Pre Requisite : Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 30Total Hours PerWeek : 30Description : This is a part of the M.Tech Project to be done in the 10th semester by Dual Degree students and in the 4th semester by M.Tech students. Course Content : Project Work Text Books : Not Applicable Reference Books : Not Applicable | 30 | 0 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 30 - 30 |

194 | EE6999 | Special Topics in Electrical Engineering Course No : EE6999Course Title : Special Topics in Electrical EngineeringPre Requisite : NilExtended Tutorial: Outside Class Hours : Total Hours PerWeek : Description : The course envisages to train research scholar in the preparation of a “critical review of literature”, present the same in the form of a written report and make as oral presentation before members of DC and invitees and take feedback. Course Content : Review of literature in the related area. Text Books : As prescribed by the guide. Reference Books : Relevant journal paper. | 3 | - - - - - |

195 | EE7001 | Directed Study on Research Topics Course No : EE7001Course Title : Directed Study on Research TopicsPre Requisite : NoneExtended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 8Total Hours PerWeek : 12Description : To introduce students to recent research in an advanced topic of interest to the student. Course Content : To be determined by the faculty member and the student with consent of the coordinator. The method of evaluation will be similar to project evaluation. Text Books : 1. Recent textbooks and papers relevant to the chosen research area. Reference Books : ---------- | 12 | 4 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 8 - 12 |

196 | EE7041 | Biomedical Engineering Course No : EE7041Course Title : Biomedical EngineeringPre Requisite : CoTExtended Tutorial: Outside Class Hours : 4Total Hours PerWeek : Description : • Students should get a basic understanding of circulatory, ventilator and renal physiology. • Students should obtain a basic understanding how to model pathophysiology and man-machine interaction using first principles and electro-physiological analogues. • Students should obtain an understanding of the function of life-supporting devices. • Students should obtain a basic understanding of upcoming new monitoring technologies • Students should get a feeling for the growing demand for surgical simulators and the connected technologies Course Content : 1.) Introduction to circulatory physiology I 2.) Introduction to circulatory physiology II 3.) Heart pacemakers and implanted defibrillators I 4.) Heart pacemakers and implanted defibrillators II 5.) Ventricular assist devices (VADs) and total artificial hearts (TAHs) 6.) Introduction to lung physiology and pathophysiology I 7.) Introduction to lung physiology and pathophysiology II 8.) Artificial Ventilators 9.) Extracorporeal Membrane Oxygenators (ECMO devices) 10.) Anaesthesia devices I 11.) Anaesthesia devices II 12.) Introduction to cerebrospinal fluid (CSF) physiology and to hydrocephalus therapy 13.) Introduction to glucose metabolism and the pathophysiology of diabetes mellitus including 14.) Introduction to renal physiology 15.) Dialysis machines 16.) Modalities for noncontact cardiovascular monitoring (capacitive ECG, magnetic impedance) 17.) Dynamics of blood flow 18.) Invasive measurement of constituents of blood 19.) Optical sensors for the measurement of venous blood flow dynamics 20.) Measurement of oxygen saturation in arterial blood 21.) An analytical model for the attenuation light in optical sensors 22.) Calibration free measurement of venous blood flow dynamics 23.) Model based measurement of oxygen saturation in arterial blood 24.) Model based measurement of hemoglobin content in arterial blood 25.) Fundamentals of ocular system 26.) Ailments and treatments in ocular system 27.) The cataract surgery and opthalmic anaesthesia 28.) Opthalmic anaesthesia training system Text Books : Class notes and hand outs Reference Books : Published papers | 6 | 2 - - - - 4 - |

197 | EE7500 | Advanced Topics in RF and Photonics Course No : EE7500Course Title : Advanced Topics in RF and PhotonicsPre Requisite : COTExtended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 6Total Hours PerWeek : 9Description : To teach students recent research and technology advances in the area that are of current interest. Course Content : To be decided Text Books : To be decided Reference Books : To be decided | 9 | 3 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 6 - 9 |

198 | EE7999 | Special Topics in Electrical Engineering Course No : EE7999Course Title : Special Topics in Electrical EngineeringPre Requisite : NilExtended Tutorial: Outside Class Hours : Total Hours PerWeek : Description : The course envisages to train research scholar in presenting simulation / preliminary experimental / analytical verification of prior art in the area of research, in the form of a report and an oral presentation to the DC and invitees and take feedback Course Content : To be suggested by the guide Text Books : To be prescribed by the guide. Reference Books : To be prescribed by the guide. | 3 | - - - - - |

199 | EE8005 | Complex Light Course No : EE8005Course Title : Complex LightPre Requisite : Extended Tutorial: 2Outside Class Hours : 0Total Hours PerWeek : 0Description : To study light beams with the ability to overcome the limitations of the standard Gaussian beam. This course will explore the shaping of light in phase and amplitude to generate complex light (Bessel, Airy, Laguerre-Gaussian modes and also shaped modes for enhanced transmission in scattering media) . Course Content : 1. Basics of Gaussian beam optics and use in imaging (confocal. multi photon) 2. Introduction to complex light: propagation invariant beams (Bessel, Airy) and Laguerre-Gaussian modes 3. Dynamic diffractive optics: spatial light modulators and digital micro mirror devices for complex light generation 4. Complex light for imaging, e.g., light sheet imaging, super-resolution spectroscopy (STED, SIM) 5. Basics of optical micromanipulation, complex light for micromanipulation 6. Complex light for enhanced depth penetration: biomedical studies, multimode fibres and applications Text Books : Gaussian beams in the optics course, Galvez, Am. J. Physics, vol 74, issue 4, 10.1119/1.2178849 (2002); DOI: hLp://dx.doi.org/10.1119/1.2178849 Bessel beams. J.Durnin, JOSA A-Opt. Image Sci. Vis. 4, 651-654, (1987). G. A. Siviloglou, J. Broky, A. Dogariu, and D. N. Christodoulides, Observation of Acccelerating Airy Beams, Phys. Rev. Lett., 99, 213901 (2007) Reference Books : K. C. Neuman and S. M. Block, "Optical trapping," Review of Scientific Instruments, vol. 75, no. 9, p. 2787, 2004. A. Ashkin, J. M. Dziedzic, J. E. Bjorkholm, and S. Chu, "Observation of a single-beam gradient force optical trap for dielectric particles," Optics Letters, vol. 11, no. 5, p. 288, 1986. | 2 | 1 - 0 - 0 - 2 - 0 - 0 |

200 | EE8007 | GIAN :Microwave Photonics- Technologies, Systems and Networks Course No : EE8007Course Title : GIAN :Microwave Photonics- Technologies, Systems and NetworksPre Requisite : Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 0Total Hours PerWeek : 0Description : • Understand the modalities of interactions between lightwaves and microwaves • Explain the key microwave photonic devices and system concepts • Design, analyse and evaluate system requirements of microwave photonic systems • Elucidate the key microwave photonic system technologies for meeting the fronthaul and backhaul part of mobile broadband networks • Develop an understanding of system technologies for optical and wireless network integration including the radio over fibre transport options • To outline how future converged optical and wireless networks could be designed and optimised to provide broadband Course Content : Part I (Week 1) - Fundamentals of Microwave Photonic Systems (1) Lightwave – Microwave Interactions – Basic Principles [ 1 Lecture] (2) Electro-Optic Systems – Building Blocks of Microwave Photonic Systems incorporating introduction to optical sources, photodetectors, electro-optical modulation, optical gain, optical modulation – intensity and phase, linearity, signal to noise ratio, intermodulation, crosstalk [7 Lectures] (3) Microwave Photonic Systems – Antenna Remoting – Radio over Fibre and other signal transport schemes, Photonics Signal Processing of Microwave Signals, Photonic Beam Forming Techniques [7 Lectures] Part II (Week2) – Microwave Photonics Based Approaches towards Optical-Wireless Convergence (1) Mobile Broadband: - understanding current network and system architectures and requirements, network evolution and future requirements [ 2 Lectures] (2) Mobile Networks – a system architecture, basestations, distributed antenna systems, fronthaul and backhaul and performance requirements [2 lectures] (3) Optical systems for networking of mobile basestations – system requirements, key photonic technologies, optical transport of wireless signals, system architectures and developments including CPRI – optical interface used by industry in current 3G/4G systems [6 Lectures] (4) Optical networks – basic PON and wavelength division multiplexed network architectures for interconnecting antenna base-stations [2 Lectures] (5) Optical Networking of Wireless Networks – basic planning constraints, an optimisation framework and a case study of small cell deployment and design. [3 Lectures] Text Books : Microwave Photonics: Devices and Applications Stavros Iezekiel (Editor),, Wiley Fiber Optic Communication : G P Agrawal, Wiley Reference Books : Research Papers - Special Issue on Microwave Photonics, IEEE Microwave Magazine, Issue Sept 2015 and others suggested during the course. | 6 | 6 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 0 |

201 | EE8008 | GIAN 61003D01: Advanced Group-IV Semiconductor Electronic and Optoelectronic devices Course No : EE8008Course Title : GIAN 61003D01: Advanced Group-IV Semiconductor Electronic and Optoelectronic devicesPre Requisite : Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 0Total Hours PerWeek : 3Description : The course will begin provide material of interest to researchers in optoelectronics, particularly Group IV device physics. We will introduce the basics concepts of electron spin and magnetism, the principles of group-IV-heterostructure fabrication, and lead into advanced topics such as electron spin diffusion and quantum tunnelling as applicable to devices such as tunnel field effect transistors, spin-FETs. The course will also emphasize the role of quantum confinement in spintronic and optoele Course Content : - Introduction and review of quantum mechanics (2 lectures)Fundamental equations of quantum mechanicsCalculation of tunnelling currents- Advanced group-IV-materials: Ge-, SiGeSn- and GeSn-alloys (2 lectures)Basic principles of group-IV-heterostructure fabrication (strain, defects, virtual substrates) Manufacturing and properties of Ge-, SiGeSn- and GeSn-alloys - Group-IV-based devices for end of the roadmap and beyond CMOS (7 lectures)Tunnel field effect transistors: operating principle, device physics, state of the art devices and current challengesBasic description of electron spin and magnetismSpintronic devices: memory devices, Spin-FETs, nanomagnetic logic and all-spin logic - GeSn- and SiGeSn-based optoelectronic devices (3 lectures)Basics of optoelectronic devices Role of quantum mechanical confinement State-of-the art bulk and quantum-well GeSn- and SiGeSn-devices Text Books : Lecture notes Reference Books : Lecture notes | 3 | 3 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 3 |

202 | EE8009 | GIAN 161003D03- Silicon Photonics: Linear, Nonlinear, and Quantum Integrated Photonics Devices and Circuits Course No : EE8009Course Title : GIAN 161003D03- Silicon Photonics: Linear, Nonlinear, and Quantum Integrated Photonics Devices and CircuitsPre Requisite : Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 0Total Hours PerWeek : 0Description : The goal of this course is to teach students/researchers who have some knowledge of basic guided-wave optics and of CMOS electronics how to specify, design, fabricate, measure and characterize silicon photonic devices which can be used in modern communication systems, such as transceivers, switches, routers, etc. as well as in spectroscopic instrumentation, imaging systems, and other emerging applications. We will cover the basics of high-index contrast optical waveguides, directional couplers, fiber-waveguide interfaces, electro-optic modulators, photodetectors, amplifiers, and systems-level device modeling approaches. The course will include “design challenges” wherein a systems-level specification is provided, and we will attempt to design and simulate a device which can meet those requirements. The course will also discuss the growing potential for silicon photonics in emerging areas such as integrated nonlinear optoelectronics and quantum photonics. Course Content : 1. Electronic and optical properties of silicon, convergence of CMOS electronics and photonics 2. Single-mode and multimode waveguide design in SOI substrate; polarization and dispersion effects 3. Orthogonality condition, coupled mode theory and multimode interference (MMI) 4. Design and working principle of MMI based power splitter, directional coupler (DC), and distributed Bragg reflector (DBR) 5. Design and working principle of Mach-Zehnder interferometer (MZI) and microring resonator (MRR) 6. Fiber-waveguide interface : grating coupler, spot-size converter and waveguide trimming 7. Thermo-optic and plasma-optic tuning: integration of microheater and p-i-n/p-n phase-shifters 8. Design and working principles of modulators, switches, tunable filters, variable optical attenuator (VOA) 9. III-V integration for light sources: state of the art technology and implementation 10. Hybrid integration of photodetectors: state of the art technology and implementation 11. Waveguide-integrated junction linear and avalanche photodetectors. 12. Advanced review of guided-wave light propagation in high index contrast waveguides. 13. Nonlinear effects in silicon photonics. 14. Four-wave mixing, wavelength conversion, two-photon absorption and free-carrier induced limitations; carrier sweepout for partial improvement. 15. Nonlinear effects in micro-resonators; slow and fast light effects; enhancements and impairments. Frequency comb generation. 16. Raman effect, Brillouin effect, coupling to electronic (carrier) and thermal effects. Amplitude-phase coupling in wavelength conversion and in hybrid lasers. 17. Introduction to quantum photonics and the role played by solid-state materials. Photon generation, qubit manipulation and detection technologies. 18. Continued discussion of photon generation, qubit manipulation and detection technologies. 19. Emerging applications (Devices & Systems) Text Books : Lecture Notes Reference Books : Lecture Notes | 6 | 6 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 0 |

203 | EE8010 | GIAN161003D04: Fundamentals of Numerical Modelling and Simulation of Multi-Physics and Multi-Domain Systems Course No : EE8010Course Title : GIAN161003D04: Fundamentals of Numerical Modelling and Simulation of Multi-Physics and Multi-Domain Systems Pre Requisite : Basic linear algebra and differential equationsExtended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 0Total Hours PerWeek : 0Description : This course aims to strike the right balance between rigorous formulations and mathematics and the use of numerical modelling and simulation technology in real science and engineering. Participants will have a chance to gain firsthand experience on the practical application of the modelling and numerical simulation techniques treated in this course through programming assignments for every part of the course. After going through with this course, the participants will have a rigorous and practical set of tools that will enable them to figure out which numerical simulation techniques are most suitable in solving the problems they face. They will be able to quickly implement and produce efficient, effective and customized solutions for their problems by exploiting domain and problem specific intuition and information. This course will also enable them to become wise and informed users of numerical modelling and simulation software and tools, since they will acquire intimate knowledge of, and first hand observe, the subtleties and problems that can arise in numerical methods and simulations. Course Content : Governing equations, automated generation of systems of equations Numerical solution of linear algebraic equations Numerical solution of nonlinear algebraic equations Numerical solution of ordinary differential equations Text Books : None(GIAN course-recorded lectures will be available) Reference Books : Jacob White, Jaime Peraire, Luca Daniel, Nicholas Hadjiconstantinou, and Anthony Patera. 6.336J Introduction to Numerical Simulation (SMA 5211), Fall 2003. (Massachusetts Institute of Technology: MIT OpenCourseWare), https://ocw.mit.edu License: Creative Commons BY-NC-SA: https://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-sa/4.0/ Some lecture notes, homework problems and MATLAB code are based on/from • Numerical Computing with MATLAB, Cleve Moler, http://www.mathworks.com/moler/index_ncm.html | 3 | 3 - 0 - 3 - 0 - 0 - 0 |

204 | EE8011 | GIAN161003D05: Computational Techniques for Frequency-domain and Perturbation Analysis of Electronic and Multi-Physics Systems Course No : EE8011Course Title : GIAN161003D05: Computational Techniques for Frequency-domain and Perturbation Analysis of Electronic and Multi-Physics SystemsPre Requisite : Basics of linear algebra and differential equationsExtended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 0Total Hours PerWeek : 0Description : The course has several objectives: 1) to bridge the large gap between typical undergraduate numerical math courses and useful modelling/simulation practice for real science and engineering problems; 2) via the hands-on components using MAPP, to ensure that students translate concepts learned in class into practical implementations that actually work, thus developing real understanding of the material and confidence in their own abilities; 3) to have students appreciate the considerable commonalities in modelling/simulation techniques for different multi-physics applications that, at first sight, often seem unrelated; 4) to have students clearly appreciate the role of nonlinearity in modelling and simulation, while at the same time appreciating the importance of linear analysis techniques for both nonlinear and linear problems; 5) to show students how noise analysis of circuits and systems, typically learned at the undergraduate level in an ad-hoc manner that often leads to future confusion, can be understood properly and clearly using concepts from random variables and stochastic processes. Course Content : Course overview, introduction to MAPP, and AC analysis. Eigenanalysis. Programming your own analysis in MAPP. Sensitivity analysis. Stationary noise in linear(ized) systems. Noise (contd). Simulation of oscillatory systems. Steady state methods, distortion. Text Books : None(GIAN course-recorded lectures and slides will be available) Reference Books : None(GIAN course-recorded lectures and slides will be available) | 3 | 3 - 0 - 3 - 0 - 0 - 0 |

205 | EE8012 | GIAN161003D06: Near/sub-threshold circuits and architectures for microprocessors Course No : EE8012Course Title : GIAN161003D06: Near/sub-threshold circuits and architectures for microprocessors Pre Requisite : Basic analog and digital circuitsExtended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 0Total Hours PerWeek : 0Description : The goal of the course is to have students understand key challenges in designing near/sub-threshold voltage digital computing hardware and also learn techniques to address them. Course Content : Motivations; near/sub-threshold voltage circuits; transistor characteristics in near/sub-threshold voltages Gate-level design; standard-cell design optimization Variability challenge overview: sensor-based adaptive design; adaptive design based on in-situ error detection and correction techniques part-1 Adaptive design based on in-situ error detection and correction techniques part-2 Pipeline and parallel architectures in near/sub-threshold voltage circuits. Text Books : None(GIAN course-recorded lectures and slides will be available) Reference Books : None(GIAN course-recorded lectures and slides will be available) | 3 | 3 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 0 |

206 | EE8013 | GIAN171003D01: Coupling-Matrix Design of Advanced RF/Microwave Filters Course No : EE8013Course Title : GIAN171003D01: Coupling-Matrix Design of Advanced RF/Microwave FiltersPre Requisite : Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 2Total Hours PerWeek : 3Description : This short course introduces students to the science and art of advanced RF/microwave filter design. Students taking this course should be familiar with fundamental RF concepts such as impedance matching, transmission line theory and scattering parameters. Previous exposure to filter design is helpful but not required. Course Content : The course starts by introducing students to the importance of RF filters in modern reconfigurable communication systems followed by the fundamentals of filter design. It subsequently introduces students to the coupling-matrix design theory followed by many practical synthesis examples. Without sacrificing mathematical rigor, the course emphasizes the practical step-by-step design process. Relevant matlab scripts will be provided to students so they can perform their own designs. Students will be able to design complex transfer-function filters that go beyond traditional textbook-style filters. In addition, planar and three dimensional practical filter examples will be presented. The course will conclude by providing examples of the most successful reconfigurable filter architectures that exploit the aforementioned techniques. Students completing this course will be able to understand basic and advanced filter concepts as well as comprehend state-of-the-art tunable designs published in the technical literature. Text Books : Lecture Notes Reference Books : Lecture Notes | 3 | 1 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 2 - 3 |

207 | EE8014 | GIAN171003D02: Quantum error correction and its relations to statistical physics Course No : EE8014Course Title : GIAN171003D02: Quantum error correction and its relations to statistical physicsPre Requisite : Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 2Total Hours PerWeek : 3Description : Quantum error correction is indispensable to building a quantum computer and protecting quantum information. This rapidly growing field has deep and fruitful connexions to many areas of physics, specifically statistical physics, which lead to new insights and applications. For example, these connexions have enabled the constructions of efficient decoders, the characterization of channel capacity in terms of phase transition, and the discovery of new phases of matter. After a general introduction to the topic of quantum error correction, this course will cover advanced topics, with a special emphasis on its relations to statistical physics. It will present landmark results as well as state-of-the-art current research topics. Although familiarity with either classical linear codes and/or statistical physics could be useful, neither are necessary. Some familiarity with quantum mechanics will be? ?assumed? ?(state? ?vector,? ?matrix? ?algebra,? ?etc.) The primary objectives of the course are as follows: i) Become familiar with modern and advanced research topics in the field of quantum error correction. ii) Learn how to apply some of the tools of statistical physics to this setting. Course Content : The stabilizer formalism & the decoding problem The surface code & topological quantum order Surface code decoding: renormalization, mapping to Ising model, fault tolerance LDPC codes, belief propagation, free-energy and mean-field theory Relations to tensor networks, polar codes and beyond Text Books : None. (Lectures will be recorded.) Reference Books : Quantum error correction. Edited by Daniel Lidar and Todd Brun. Cambridge univeristy press 2013 | 3 | 1 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 2 - 3 |

208 | EE8015 | GIAN 151003D01 Millimeter Wave Integrated Circuits: 60GHz and Beyond Course No : EE8015Course Title : GIAN 151003D01 Millimeter Wave Integrated Circuits: 60GHz and BeyondPre Requisite : Analog IC DesignExtended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 4Total Hours PerWeek : 0Description : Objectives: The objective of the course is to train the student in the principles of mmWave IC design. This willbe accomplished through in-class lectures, short home-works and a brief class project on thedesign of a 60GHz receiver front-end in 90nm CMOS technology. The home-works and briefclass project will use industry-grade circuit and EM simulation toolsthus preparing the student for millimeter-wave circuit and system design. Course Content : Course Contents:o Introduction to mmWave systems and applications.o Si-based devices for mmWave (Modern SiGe and CMOS technologies, fT, fmax, currentdensityscaling, large-signal models).o Si-based passive devices (Inductors, capacitors, resonators, transformers, transmissionlines, impact of BEOL).o mmWave amplifier design (Max. available gain, max. unilateral gain, cascade vs.cascode)o mmWave and microwave low-noise amplifier design (CS, CB, NFmin, Yopt, noisecircles).o mmWave power-amplifier design (Class A-F, load-pull, efficiency/output power circles,impedance transformation and power combining).o mmWave mixers for frequency translation.o mmWave VCOs (LC oscillators, standing-wave oscillators, push-push and distributedoscillators).o Oscillator phase-noise theory and its impact on mmWave VCO design.o Injection locking, injection pulling and coupled oscillators.o mmWave frequency synthesis (Regenerative dividers, injection locked dividers,mmWave PLLs).o Phased arrays and multiple-antenna systems (Architectures, phase-shifter circuits). Text Books : Notes from Prof.Harish Krishnaswamy, Columbia University Reference Books : Selected papers from the IEEE Journal of Solid State Circuits and IEEE Trans. on Microwave Theory and Techniques. | 6 | 2 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 4 - 0 |

209 | EP3200 | Photonics Course No : EP3200Course Title : PhotonicsPre Requisite : PH1020,EE2025Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 6Total Hours PerWeek : 10Description : To introduce students to Photonics and the engineering of light. Students will not have done quantum mechanics for most part and the course introduces the concepts without requiring a background in classical or quantum mechanics. Course Content : Introduction to some photonic systems: LIGO, fiber optic communication systems Review of classical properties of light: Reflection, refraction, dispersion, interference, polarization Coherence, Gaussian Beam Optics, Fabry Perot Resonators The Photon and its properties Light sources: Principles of light-matter interaction- absorption, emission, Simple rate equation modelling of lasers: gain, saturation, amplifiers, Semiconductor lasers, Noise in Laser Diode Detectors: Working principle of photomultiplier tubes, PIN/APD diodes, Noise in detectors Optical Fibres: Ray approach to fibre optics, extension to modes, Propagation of light in fibers- attenuation, dispersion Photonics in different Engineering Applications: Plasmonics, Optical sensors, Photonic Integrated Circuits Text Books : Optics - Pedrotti, Pedrotti & Pedrotti, 3rd Edition, Pearson Reference Books : Fundamentals of Photonics- Saleh and Teich, 2nd Edition, Wiley | 10 | 3 - 1 - 0 - 0 - 6 - 10 |

210 | ID3010 | Sensory, Motor and Language Disorders Course No : ID3010Course Title : Sensory, Motor and Language DisordersPre Requisite : Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 6Total Hours PerWeek : 9Description : To familiarize students with aspects of human anatomy and physiology necessary for rehabilitation engineering.The course will introduce students to the anatomy and physiology of the human body, the broad areas of disability, different kinds of impairments, the WHO classifications on Functioning, Disability and Health, their impact on child’s development and the ability for an individual to function in an area of life. Students should be able to propose simple assistive devices to address the fun Course Content : International Classification of Functioning for Adults, International Classification of Functioning of Children and Youth impact of impairment on learning and development: areas of functioning; role of environment; concept of participation The visual system: Anatomy and physiology, eye disease, visual impairment and impact on learning and development The auditory system: Anatomy and Physiology, hearing Impairment, language intervention (oral and sign language) Motor systems: Anatomy and physiology, locomotor impairments (muscular dystrophy, polio, club foot, Erb’s palsy) Complex sensory motor disorders: Deaf-blindness, cerebral palsy Technology intervention and use of assistive devices Text Books : 1. International Classification of Functioning, WHO 2. Children with Disabilities, Mark Batshaw M.D., Nancy Roizen M.D., Laura Anthony and Philippa Campbell Reference Books : 1. Cook and Hussey's Assistive Technologies: Principles and Practice, Albert M. Cook and Jan M. Polgar 2. Computer Access for People with Disabilities: A Human Factors Approach, Richard C. Simpson | 9 | 3 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 6 - 9 |

211 | ID3020 | Design of Assistive Devices Course No : ID3020Course Title : Design of Assistive DevicesPre Requisite : ID3010Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 6Total Hours PerWeek : 9Description : To teach the design principles necessary for assistive technologies, and build prototype device. The course will introduce students to basic mechanical and electrical design useful for designing assistive devices. Students should be able to design simple assistive devices using mechanisms, motors, sensors and microcontrollers. Course Content : Basic kinematics, degrees of freedom and types of mechanisms Design of mechanisms (4-bar, 6-bar, slider-crank, intermittent motion mechanisms, etc) Determination of forces and torques in mechanisms Selection of materials and basic mechanical components – fasteners, springs, gears, etc Basic op-amp circuits, amplifiers and filters Sensors, motors and actuators Digital electronics, microcontrollers, ADC, sampling Batteries, power management, ratings Laboratory exercises Device design and demonstration Text Books : 1. R.L. Norton, Kinematics and Dynamics of Machinery. Tata McGraw Hill, 2009 2. S. Franco, Design with operational amplifiers and integrated circuits, Mcgraw-Hill College; 2nd ed., 1997 Reference Books : 1. J. J. Uicker, G. R., Pennock, and J. E. Shigley, Theory of Machines and Mechanisms. Oxford University Press, 2003 2 . R.L. Norton, Machine Design, An Integrated Approach. Pearson Education, 2000 | 9 | 3 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 6 - 9 |

212 | ID5840 | Quantum Integer Programming Course No : ID5840Course Title : Quantum Integer ProgrammingPre Requisite : An understanding of probability, calculus, statistics, graph theory, algorithms, and linear algebra is assumed. Knowledge of linear and integer programming will be useful.Extended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 6Total Hours PerWeek : 9Description : This course is primarily designed for graduate students (and advanced undergraduates) interested in integer programming (with non-linear objective functions) and the potential of near-term quantum and quantum-inspired computing for solving combinatorial optimization problems. By the end of the semester, someone enrolled in this course should be able to: • Appreciate the current status of quantum computing and its potential use for integer programming • Access and use quantum computing resources • Set up a given integer program to be solved with quantum computing • Work in groups collaboratively on a state-of-the-art project involving applications of quantum computing and integer programming Course Content : Part1-Integerprogramming(classicalmethods): Integer Programming basics, cutting plane theory and relaxations, introduction to test sets, Grobner basis, Graver basis. Part 2 - Ising, QUBO : Ising model basics, simulated annealing, Markov-chain Monte Carlo methods, benchmarking classical methods, formulating combinatorial problems as QUBOs Part 3 - Hardware for solving Ising/QUBO : Graphical Processing Units, Tensor Processing Units, Digital Annealers, Oscillator Based Computing, Coherent Ising Machines Part 4 - Quantum methods for solving Ising/QUBO : Adiabatic Quantum Computing and Quantum Annealing, Quantum Approximate Optimization Algorithm Part 5 - Graver Augmented Multiseed algorithm (GAMA): GAMA with applications: Portfolio Optimization, Cancer Genomics and Quantum Inspired methods such as Quadratic Semi-Assignment. Part 6 - Other topics: Quantum Annealing, Gate-based Noisy Intermediate Scale Quantum (NISQ) devices Text Books : Eleanor G. Rieffel and Wolfgang H. Polak, Quantum Computing: A Gentle Introduction, MIT Press, 2011 Richard J. Lipton and Kenneth W. Regan, Quantum Algorithms via Linear Algebra. A Primer, MIT Press, 2014. Reference Books : Journal papers as prescribed during the course | 9 | 3 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 6 - 9 |

213 | IG6001 | GIAN 151003D01: Millimeter Wave Integrated Circuits: 60GHz and Beyond Course No : IG6001Course Title : GIAN 151003D01: Millimeter Wave Integrated Circuits: 60GHz and BeyondPre Requisite : Analog IC Design, EM FieldsExtended Tutorial: 0Outside Class Hours : 4Total Hours PerWeek : 6Description : The objective of the course is to train the student in the principles of mmWave IC design. This will be accomplished through in-class lectures, short home-works and a brief class project on the design of a 60GHz receiver front-end in 90nm CMOS technology. The home-works and brief class project will use industry-grade circuit and EM simulation tools thus preparing the student for millimeter-wave circuit and system design. Course Content : o Introduction to mmWave systems and applications.? o Si-based devices for mmWave (Modern SiGe and CMOS technologies, fT, fmax, current- density scaling, large-signal models).? o Si-based passive devices (Inductors, capacitors, resonators, transformers, transmission lines, impact of BEOL).? o mmWave amplifier design (Max. available gain, max. unilateral gain, cascade vs. cascode)? o mmWave and microwave low-noise amplifier design (CS, CB, NFmin, Yopt, noise circles).? o mmWave power-amplifier design (Class A-F, load-pull, efficiency/output power circles, impedance transformation and power combining).? o mmWave mixers for frequency translation.? o mmWave VCOs (LC oscillators, standing-wave oscillators, push-push and distributed oscillators). o Oscillator phase-noise theory and its impact on mmWave VCO design.? o Injection locking, injection pulling and coupled oscillators.? o mmWave frequency synthesis (Regenerative dividers, injection locked dividers, mmWave PLLs). o Phased arrays and multiple-antenna systems (Architectures, phase-shifter circuits). Text Books : Notes from Prof.Harish Krishnaswamy, Columbia University Reference Books : Selected papers from the IEEE Journal of Solid State Circuits and IEEE Trans. on Microwave Theory and Techniques. | 6 | 2 - 0 - 0 - 0 - 4 - 6 |